JP6674089B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

  Pachinko related to gaming machines.

  In recent years, as a pachinko gaming machine, a jackpot lottery with a predetermined probability is made when a game ball enters a starting port on a game board surface (game area). ) State, pachinko gaming machines that can open a large winning prize port provided on the game board surface and obtain a large amount of prize balls are mainstream. Among the pachinko gaming machines configured in this way, there is a probability varying gaming state in which the winning probability in the jackpot lottery is increased, and a time reducing gaming state in which the efficiency of symbol variation for notifying the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is increased. There are also gaming machines that have a game progress state that creates an advantageous game progress state for the player based on these game states, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

JP-A-61-255680 JP 2005-296613 A JP 2005-152440 A JP 2007-313212 A

  However, since there have been many such gaming machines, there is a problem that the development of a model that realizes a more novel gaming property is desired.

Pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect,
A first starting port (for example, a first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which game balls can enter,
A variable member attached to a second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) and displaceable between an open state and a closed state. The game ball can enter the main game start port B10) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when displaced to the closed state, the game ball is set in the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). A variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured to be difficult to enter the ball compared to the non-enterable or open state,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state (for example, a first winning opening C10, a second winning opening C20);
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g);
A second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) for controlling the production display on the production display unit (for example, the production display device SG),
The main game section (for example, main control board M)
First random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering a first starting port (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
The first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, and then the first identification information is stopped. First identification information display control means for controlling to display,
Second random number acquiring means for acquiring a second random number based on a ball entering a second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10);
The second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition unit, and then the second identification information is stopped. Second identification information display control means for controlling to display,
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, a predetermined number of variable winning openings (for example, the first winning opening C10 and the second winning opening C20) are provided. Until a ball is entered or a predetermined period elapses, a special game is executed in which a variable winning port (for example, the first winning port C10 or the second winning port C20) is executed in a unit game that can make the player an advantageous state. Special game control means that is possible,
A low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and a stop where the first identification information or the second identification information belongs to the predetermined group. Has a high probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in the display mode is higher than the predetermined probability,
As a game state related to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d), the normal game state and a variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) which are more variable than the normal game state. ) Has a specific game state that is likely to be open,
Special game if a high probability lottery condition as one unit to be executed, and the one unit is configured so that can be a low probability lottery state 且 one specific game state when a predetermined number of times in succession,
If it is a specific game state, it is configured so that it can be controlled not to be in a normal game state until a predetermined condition is satisfied,
A first variable period state in which the average value of the variable display period of the identification information is the first period, and a second variable period in which the average value of the variable display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period And at least a period state, and controls to be able to be a first variable period state in a first specific period in a specific game state after the end of execution of the special game, and in the case of the first variable period state, a specific condition is satisfied. Up to, it is configured so that it can be controlled not to be in the second fluctuation period state,
From the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display as one unit, the unit is configured to be executed at least once in the first specific period. And
It has a plurality of types of stop display mode as a stop display mode belonging to a first predetermined group in the predetermined group,
It has a plurality of types of stop display modes as a stop display mode belonging to a second predetermined group in the predetermined group,
A period until the predetermined condition is satisfied when a specific game state is set after the end of the special game executed by any one of the plurality of types of stop display modes belonging to the first predetermined group is stopped and displayed. A period until the predetermined condition is satisfied in a case where a specific game state is set after the end of the special game executed when any of the plurality of types of stop display modes belonging to the second predetermined group is stopped and displayed. Is configured to be relatively short-lived,
The sub game unit (for example, sub control board S)
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M);
Effect display content control means capable of controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
It has a plurality of stay stages as stay stages depending upon controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
It is configured such that the display tendency of the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) is different due to the different stay stages,
And staying the stage in the low probability lottery state 且 one particular game state and stays stage in the high probability lottery state 且 one specific game state is configured to be the same,
Even in the high-probability lottery state and the specific game state, even in the low-probability lottery state and the specific game state, the specific game state can be maintained in the second specific period that is longer than the first specific period. On the other hand, in the case of the high probability lottery state and the specific game state, unlike the case of the low probability lottery state and the specific game state, the specific game state can be maintained even after the second specific period has elapsed. It is configured as follows,
Even in the high-probability lottery state and the specific game state, the low-probability lottery state and the specific game state have the same timing at which the average value of the variable display period of the identification information switches within the second specific period. Is composed of
In the high-probability lottery state and the specific game state after the lapse of the second specific period, a special game when a specific effect is executed, as compared with the high-probability lottery state and the specific game state before the lapse of the second specific period. A pachinko gaming machine characterized by having a relatively high transfer expectation .

  According to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, further novel gaming properties can be realized in a gaming machine employing a concept of creating a game progress state advantageous to a player.

FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a configuration applicable to this example. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a configuration applicable to this example. FIG. 3 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a flowchart of an auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of a main game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of a main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a configuration diagram of a main game table used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart of a specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of a special game operating condition determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of a special game-related display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of stay stage determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of a stay stage determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the limited frequency change mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 26 is a limited frequency table on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of a specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the first main game suspension prefetch determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the second main game suspension prefetch determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the prefetch pending content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of stay stage determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 35 is a flowchart of the limited frequency A variation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the limited frequency B variation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 37 is a limited frequency table on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the second embodiment. FIG. 39 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 40 is an operation diagram relating to the open entrance of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 41 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 44 is a flowchart of a promotion count control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of a special game operating condition determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the distribution member drive control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the first non-electrically driven accessory drive control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the second non-electrically driven accessory drive control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of a special game-related display control process on the sub-main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of stay stage determination processing on the sub-main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the third embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 2 from the third embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third modification example of the third embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of a drop lottery execution process on the main control board side in a pachinko gaming machine according to a third modification example of the third embodiment. FIG. 57 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a fourth modification example of the third embodiment. FIG. 58 is a configuration diagram of a main game table used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification Example 4 from the third embodiment. FIG. 59 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 4 from the third embodiment. FIG. 60 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 from the third embodiment. FIG. 61 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a fifth modification example of the third embodiment. FIG. 62 is an operation diagram of the distribution member unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 5 from the third embodiment. FIG. 63 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 5 from the third embodiment. FIG. 64 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 5 from the third embodiment. FIG. 65 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 5 from the third embodiment.

Forms for implementation

First, the meaning of each term in the present specification will be described. The term "entering a ball" includes not only a prize in which a prize ball is paid out but also a passage to a "through chucker" in which a prize ball is not paid out. The “identification information” may be in any form as long as the type of information can be identified through the five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, etc.), but is preferably visual, for example, numbers, characters, and patterns. And the like. Further, in the present specification, the “identification information” may be called a main game design / special design (special figure) or a decorative design (special design). The "decorative design (decorative design)" is identification information as an effect displayed on the sub-control board side. The expression “identification information can be displayed” is not limited to any display method, and includes, for example, light emission (including not only the presence or absence of light emission but also a color difference) of light emitting means (for example, liquid crystal, LED, 7-segment), physical (For example, a symbol drawn on a reel band is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position) and the like. "Direction" refers to display content that enhances the interest of the game, for example, identification information fluctuation / stop, notice, etc., moving images such as animations and live-actions, still images such as pictures, photographs, characters, etc. Combinations can be mentioned. The “open state, open state” and “closed state, closed state” are, for example, in the configuration of a general large winning opening (so-called attacker), open state = easy winning state, closed state = no winning state. It becomes an easy state. In addition, for example, a state of protruding from the game board (player side) (hereinafter, may be referred to as an advanced state) and a state of being retracted into the game board (opposite to the player side) (hereinafter, referred to as an evacuation state) (A so-called tongue-type attacker), the advance state = the winning state is easy, and the retracted state = the winning state is not easy. The “random number” is a random number used in a lottery (a lottery by an electronic computer) for determining some game content in a pachinko gaming machine, and includes a pseudo-random number in addition to a narrowly-defined random number (for example, a hard random number is used as a random number). Soft random numbers as random numbers and pseudo random numbers). For example, a so-called “basic random number” that affects the result of a game, specifically, a “winning random number (a random number for winning or losing lottery)” related to the transition of a special game, and a variation mode (or variation time) of an identification symbol are determined. "Variation mode determining random number" for determining a stop symbol, "symbol determining random number" for determining a stop symbol, "hit symbol determining random number" for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game (for example, a probability varying game) after a special game, and the like. be able to. It is not necessary to use all of these random numbers when determining the content of the variation mode and the content of the definite identification information, and it is sufficient to use at least one random number that is the same or different from each other. In this specification, the number of random numbers may be indicated in the form of the number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers. Is called one random number (that is, in the above example, a bundle of random numbers of winning random number + variation mode determining random number + symbol determining random number... Is referred to as one random number). . Further, for example, one kind of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also serve as another kind of random number (for example, a symbol determining random number). The "game state" is, for example, a special game state in which the special winning opening can be opened, a transition to the special game state, and a transition to the special game state from a non-probability varying game state in which a lottery probability is a predetermined value. A probability variation game state in which a lottery probability is high, a transition to a special game, an auxiliary game state in which there is assistance for winning a prize in a starting opening which is a trigger for a lottery (a so-called ordinary symbol time-saving state, for example, a variable member is attached to the starting opening. In such a case, the opening period of the variable member is long, the open winning probability of the variable member is high, and the time for reporting the result of the open lottery of the variable member is short. The “expected average execution time of the easy-entering ball game per unit time” is assumed to be a situation in which the symbol change of the auxiliary game symbol is continuously performed (for example, a situation where a hold on the auxiliary game symbol is always present). In this case, it means the ratio of the open period per unit time (for example, 5 minutes) of the variable member attached to the starting port, but in terms of internal processing, in other words, based on the above-mentioned gaming state, for example, In the case where the variable member is attached to the starting port, the length of the opening period of the variable member (so-called opening extension function operating state / non-operating state), the winning of the normal symbol (auxiliary game symbol) which triggers the opening of the variable member. High / low probability (so-called high-probability state / low-probability state), length of fluctuation time of normal symbol (auxiliary game symbol) that triggers opening of the variable member (so-called general-figure fluctuation shortening function) Operating condition-actuated state), is realized by any one or more combinations of the like. The “average value of the change display period of the identification information” is not limited to the meaning of actually measuring the change display period for each change display of the identification information and taking an average value based on the measured value. More specifically, in a case where it is configured to determine the variable display period for each variable display of the identification information, and when there are a plurality of types of variable display periods to be determined (selected), , The expected value (sum of “selection probability × variable display period”) based on the plurality of types of variable display periods, but if there is only one type of variable display period candidate to be selected, that type (Ie, both concepts are included). Furthermore, a concept limited to only the average value of the variable display period of the identification information at the time of the loss, a concept limited to only the average value of the variable display period of the identification information at the time of hitting, or only the variable display period having the highest selection probability In addition, it may be supplemented that the concept of this wording is to use as an index indicating the progress speed of the game that the player can experience (accordingly, "the fluctuation period of the identification information is displayed. As a method of realizing the “average value”, the candidates of the variable display period and / or the selection probabilities are made different, or a further variable display period is added even if the candidates and / or the selection probabilities of the variable display periods are the same. There are various methods such as changing the period value at the time of execution, but the method is not limited to any one of the methods.) “A first variable period state in which the average value of the variable display period of the identification information is the first period, and a second period in which the average value of the variable display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period. Has at least a fluctuating period state, "means not only the two states but also three or more states (or any two states in the case of having three or more states) For example, in accordance with the number of times of change display of the identification information, the state transition from “first change period state” → “second change period state” → “third change period state” Including what can be taken. In this case, when the average value of the variable display period of the identification information in each state is configured such that “first variable period state” <“second variable period state” <“third variable period state”, A state transition of a high-speed game progress state → a medium-speed game progress state → a low-speed game progress state can be constructed. Of course, the opposite state transition (game progress state) may be constructed. In this case, it is suitable when used in combination with the probability fluctuation game state that continues until the next big hit and the easy state of opening the electric chew (in spite of the situation where the next big hit occurrence is definite, the next big hit cannot be obtained) As the situation continues, the progress speed of the game is improved, so that the fatigue at the time of so-called rehabilitation can be eliminated). Further, as a feature of each state, in the “first change period state”, the difference between the average value of the change display period of the identification information at the time of the loss and the average value of the change display period of the identification information at the time of a hit is “ In the "third fluctuation period state", which is smaller than the difference in the "second fluctuation period state", the difference between the average value of the fluctuation display period of the identification information at the time of the loss and the average value of the fluctuation display period of the identification information at the hit time In addition to the difference being smaller than the difference in the “second fluctuation period state”, the fluctuation display period of the identification information particularly at the time of the loss tends to be relatively long compared to the “first fluctuation period state” ( In other words, in the “second fluctuation period state”, the fluctuation display period of the identification information, especially at the time of a hit, is relatively longer in the “second fluctuation period state” than in other states. That is, the fluctuation display period of the short fluctuation loss and the fluctuation display period of the medium fluctuation loss suggesting a hit are not selected (or hard to be selected), but the fluctuation of the reach fluctuation (long fluctuation). It is possible to exemplify a characteristic that only the display period is selected (or easily selected). The “specific period in the high-probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game” may be a period from immediately after the end of the execution of the special game until a predetermined number of symbols change, or the special game. May be a period after one or a plurality of symbol changes are made after the end of the execution of the game, and until a predetermined number of symbol changes are made (that is, the high probability lottery state is maintained after the execution of the special game) If it is within the range, it means that it is an arbitrary period within the range, so the above-mentioned “first fluctuation period state” → “second fluctuation period state” → “third fluctuation period state” When the state transition can be adopted, the specific period can mean a stay period of the “first fluctuation period state” and / or the “second fluctuation period state”). “When the predetermined condition is satisfied in the information on the reservation” means that, for example, a special game (a so-called big hit game) is likely to occur at the time of holding the digestion, but the possibility that the special game will occur The criteria are not particularly limited. More specifically, "winning random number (random number for winning or losing lottery)", "variation mode determination random number" for determining the variation mode (or variation time) of the identification symbol, "symbol determination random number" for determining the stop symbol, A random number such as a "hit symbol determination random number" for determining whether or not to transition to a specific game (for example, a probability variation game) after the special game may be used as a criterion, or an event content derived from these random numbers (the result of the hit / fail judgment). , The length of the fluctuation time, the type of stop symbol, whether or not the game can be shifted to a specific game, etc.) may be used as the criterion. “Indicating or notifying the existence of a hold” means, for example, an effect at the time of holding the up to the hold (design change pattern of the decorative symbol or in conjunction with it) The execution mode of the background effect or the like can be changed. When the notification is made, for example, the display mode of the hold indicator (or an image on a liquid crystal display device) when the hold occurs (In that case, the display color is changed, the display shape is changed, etc.), the sound generated such as a hold sound or BGM is changed at the time of occurrence of the hold, and a lamp for staging at the time of occurrence of the hold. The lighting mode of the (frame lamp or the like) is changed, or the other mode (the pattern changing mode of the decorative pattern or the background mode performed in conjunction with it) performed at the time of occurrence of the suspension is performed. To To reduction, and the like. The “average value of the change display period of the identification information” is not limited to the meaning of actually measuring the change display period for each change display of the identification information and taking an average value based on the measured value. More specifically, in a case where it is configured to determine the variable display period for each variable display of the identification information, and when there are a plurality of types of variable display periods to be determined (selected), , The expected value (sum of “selection probability × variable display period”) based on the plurality of types of variable display periods, but if there is only one type of variable display period candidate to be selected, that type (Ie, both concepts are included). Furthermore, a concept limited to only the average value of the change display period of the identification information at the time of the loss, or a concept limited to only the average value of the change display period of the identification information at the time of hit (including so-called small hit time), or It may be a concept limited to only the variable display period having a high selection probability, that is, it is supplemented that the meaning of this wording is to use as an index indicating the progress speed of the game that the player can experience (accordingly, As a method for realizing the “average value of the variable display periods of the identification information”, the candidates of the variable display periods and / or the selection probabilities are different, or the candidates of the variable display periods and / or the selection probabilities are the same. There are also various methods such as changing a period value when a further variable display period is added, but the present invention is not limited to any of these methods.) The “stay stage” is a stage that depends on controlling the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display device SG. The type of background effect to be obtained, the frequency of execution of a notice effect that can be executed, the frequency of execution of a background effect that can be executed, the frequency of occurrence of a reach effect (SP reach effect, an advanced effect), and the like are different.

  The following embodiment is a model (type 1 type 1 type multifunction peripheral) in which two conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machines are mixed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the case where the present invention is applied to other gaming machines (for example, conventional pachinko gaming machines such as the first type, the second type, the third type, and the general electric machine) is also within the scope. . Note that the present embodiment is merely an example, and the order of each step in various processes, the timing of turning on / off a flag, the name of a unit responsible for the process of each step, and the like are described as an example. It is not limited to the following embodiments. In addition, it should not be understood that the above-described embodiments and modified examples are applied to specific ones in a limited manner, and any combination may be used. For example, it should be understood that a modification example of one embodiment is a modification example of another embodiment, and even if a certain modification example and another modification example are described independently, there is a certain modification. It should be understood that combinations of the modifications and the other modifications are also described. In the present embodiment, a lottery table and a reference table exist for various tables, but these are not limited, and the lottery table may be used as a reference table or vice versa. Further, in this example, the term “table” is not limited to the format, and one or more selection candidates are selected from a plurality of selection candidates based on one or more pieces of information. It should be understood that this is an associated aspect. Furthermore, numerical values as specific examples shown in the following embodiments and modifications {for example, the winning probability at the time of executing a lottery, the maximum number of rounds at the time of a special game, the symbol variation time, the number of continuations in each game state, etc. This is merely an example, and in particular, under different conditions (for example, by the condition of the first main game side and the second main game side, by the condition of the probability variation game and the non-probability variation game, and by the time reduction game and the non-probability variation game) It is understood that the magnitude relations and combinations of the numerical values shown in (e.g., conditions according to the time reduction game, etc.) may be appropriately changed as long as they do not significantly depart from the spirit of the following embodiments and modified examples. Should. For example, between the first main game side and the second main game side, the magnitude relationship between the winning probability at the time of executing the lottery and the expected value of the maximum number of rounds at the time of the special game is expressed by the first main game side = the second main game side. Even if it is illustrated as such, the magnitude relationship may be appropriately changed to the first main game side <the second main game side, or the first main game side> the second main game side. Good (same for other values and conditions). Also, for example, when configuring based on the intent to continue until the next big hit occurs as the number of times the probability varying gaming state continues, whether to set “65535” as the number of times to continue (substantially to continue), Alternatively, even in the option of the realization method based on the same purpose, such as maintaining the probability variation game state until the next big hit occurs without setting the number of continuations, as long as the purpose of the following embodiment and the modified example is not greatly deviated It should be understood that may be changed as appropriate.

  Here, a configuration applicable to the pachinko game according to the present example is shown in FIGS. 1 and 2. The following concepts can be extracted (listed) from the configurations shown in FIGS. 1 and 2. However, the concepts listed below are merely examples, and the concepts based on the further configurations shown in the embodiments described later are added to these concepts, as well as combining and separating (listing the higher-level concepts) of these listed concepts. You may. Note that a configuration in which black circles (●) shown in Configurations 1 to 9 in FIGS. 1 and 2 are more preferable, and a white circle (○) is combined with the black circle (●) shown in Configurations 1 to 9. The configuration is also suitable. Note that the time reduction game state according to this example may be that the main game time reduction flag is on or that the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, that is, the time reduction game state. May indicate that the opening time extension function is operating, or the non-time shortening game state may indicate that the opening time extension function is not operating. Note that the time shortened game state may be referred to as a specific game state, and the non-time shortened game state may be referred to as a normal game state. In addition, the probability varying game state may be referred to as a high probability lottery state, and the non-probability varying game state may be referred to as a low probability lottery state.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured to have an auxiliary game starting port, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko gaming machines according to this concept (1-1)
A first main game start port (for example, a first main game start port BA12) into which a game ball can enter;
A second main game start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which game balls can enter,
An auxiliary game start port through which game balls can enter (eg, an auxiliary game start port H10);
A distribution ball entrance (for example, a distribution entrance C20) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member attached to a first main game start port (for example, the first main game start port BA12) and displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the first main game start port ( For example, a game ball can enter the first main game starting port BA12 or is easier to enter as compared to the closed state, and when the ball is displaced to the closed state, the first main game starting port (for example, the first main game start) A variable member A (for example, a first non-motorized accessory A12hd) configured such that the game ball cannot enter the mouth BA12) or is difficult to enter as compared to the open state;
A variable member attached to a second main game start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) and displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the second main game start port ( For example, a game ball can enter the second main game start port B10 or is easier to enter as compared to the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the second main game start port (for example, the second main game start port) A variable member B (for example, a second non-electrically-powered accessory B10hd) configured such that the game ball cannot enter the mouth B10) or is difficult to enter the ball compared to the open state;
A variable member attached to a distributing entrance (for example, distributing entrance C20) and displaceable between an open state and a closed state. The game ball can enter the dispensing ball port C20) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when displaced to the closed state, the game ball is placed in the distributing ball port (for example, the dispensing ball port C20). A variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d), which is configured to be difficult to enter the ball compared to the non-enterable or open state,
A first opening (e.g., a first opening entrance C22) provided downstream of the distribution entrance (e.g., the distribution entrance C20). )When,
A second opening (for example, a second opening entrance C23) provided at a downstream side of the distribution entrance (for example, the distribution entrance C20), which is a entrance where game balls can enter. )When,
The flow direction of the game ball that has entered the distribution ball entrance (for example, the distribution ball entrance C20) is changed to the first opening (for example, the first opening entrance C22) and the second opening (for example, the second opening). The game ball is easy to enter the first opening (for example, the first opening entrance C22) when it is displaced to the first mode. A distributing member (for example, a distributing member C24) configured such that a game ball can easily enter the second opening (for example, the second open entrance C23) when displaced to the second mode;
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state (for example, a special winning opening C10);
A first main game identification information display portion capable of displaying the first main game identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g);
A second main game identification information display portion capable of displaying the second main game identification information (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An auxiliary game unit (for example, main control board M) that supports the main game;
With
The main game section (for example, main control board M)
First random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering a first main game starting port (for example, a first main game starting port BA12);
After the first main game identification information is variably displayed on the first main game identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the first main game identification information is displayed. First main game identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display the main game identification information,
A second random number acquiring means for acquiring a second random number based on a ball entering a second main game starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10);
After the second main game identification information is variably displayed on the second main game identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second main game identification information is displayed. A second main game identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display the main game identification information,
After the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, is there a predetermined number of balls entering a variable winning opening (for example, a special winning opening C10)? Or a special game control means capable of executing a special game for executing a unit game that can make a variable winning port (for example, a special winning port C10) an advantageous state for a player until a predetermined period elapses;
With
The variable member A (for example, the first non-motorized accessory A12hd) can be opened by entering a first opening (for example, the first opening ball entrance C22),
The variable member B (for example, the second non-electrically-powered accessory B10hd) can be opened by entering a second opening (for example, the second opening entrance C23),
The auxiliary game unit (for example, the main control board M)
Auxiliary game random number acquisition means for acquiring an auxiliary game random number when a game ball enters an auxiliary game start port (for example, an auxiliary game start port H10);
Auxiliary game identification information display control that performs a hit / fail determination based on the auxiliary game random number acquired by the auxiliary game random number acquisition unit, controls the auxiliary game identification information display unit to variably display the auxiliary game identification information, and then stops and displays the auxiliary game identification information. Means,
In the case where the result of the determination as to whether or not the winning is based on the random number of the auxiliary game is a win, the variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) can be displaced after the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed. After displacing the variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) from the closed state to the open state within a certain displacement drive period, one or more operations for displacing the variable member C to the closed state are performed. Easy entry ball game determination executing means for executing the easy entry ball game
With
A low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game identification The probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group has a high probability lottery state in which the probability is higher than the predetermined probability,
As the game state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member C (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d), the normal game state and the variable member C (for example, the second main game start port electric combination) Object B11d) has a specific game state in which the object B11d) is likely to be opened,
As the specific game state, the first specific game state and the first specific game state are the displacement modes of the variable member C (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) when the easy ball game is executed. Has a second specific game state that can be different,
The distribution member (for example, the distribution member C24) is configured to be able to be displaced upon execution of the easy entry ball game,
When the easy entry ball game is executed, the distribution member (for example, the distribution member C24) is configured to be displaced to the second mode after maintaining the first mode for a predetermined time,
An expected value relating to the number of prize balls given to a player by execution of a special game executed when the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, and a second main game identification It is configured such that the expected value related to the number of prize balls given to the player by execution of the special game executed by the information being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group,
As a special game, a special game A that is in a high-probability lottery state after the special game and is in the first specific game state, and a special game B that is in a high-probability lottery state after the special game and is in the second specific game state, Has at least
When the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, the ratio of the second specific game state after the end of the special game executed and the second main game identification information are changed to the predetermined group. It is configured such that the ratio of the second specific game state after the end of the special game executed by being stopped and displayed in the belonging stop display mode is different,
When the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, the game is in the high-probability lottery state after the end of the special game executed, and the second specification is performed. The ratio of the game state is the high probability lottery when the special game executed after the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group and the special game is executed. State and the second specific game state.
It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by the following.
Also,
Pachinko gaming machines according to this concept (1-2)
A first main game start port (for example, a first main game start port BA12) into which a game ball can enter;
A second main game start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which game balls can enter,
An auxiliary game start port through which game balls can enter (eg, an auxiliary game start port H10);
A distribution ball entrance (for example, a distribution entrance C20) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member attached to a first main game start port (for example, the first main game start port BA12) and displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the first main game start port ( For example, a game ball can enter the first main game starting port BA12 or is easier to enter as compared to the closed state, and when the ball is displaced to the closed state, the first main game starting port (for example, the first main game start) A variable member A (for example, a first non-motorized accessory A12hd) configured such that the game ball cannot enter the mouth BA12) or is difficult to enter as compared to the open state;
A variable member attached to a second main game start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) and displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the second main game start port ( For example, a game ball can enter the second main game start port B10 or is easier to enter as compared to the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the second main game start port (for example, the second main game start port) A variable member B (for example, a second non-electrically-powered accessory B10hd) configured such that the game ball cannot enter the mouth B10) or is difficult to enter the ball compared to the open state;
A variable member attached to a distributing entrance (for example, distributing entrance C20) and displaceable between an open state and a closed state. The game ball can enter the dispensing ball port C20) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when displaced to the closed state, the game ball is placed in the distributing ball port (for example, the dispensing ball port C20). A variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d), which is configured to be difficult to enter the ball compared to the non-enterable or open state,
A first opening (e.g., a first opening entrance C22) provided downstream of the distribution entrance (e.g., the distribution entrance C20). )When,
A second opening (for example, a second opening entrance C23) provided at a downstream side of the distribution entrance (for example, the distribution entrance C20), which is a entrance where game balls can enter. )When,
The flow direction of the game ball that has entered the distribution ball entrance (for example, the distribution ball entrance C20) is changed to the first opening (for example, the first opening entrance C22) and the second opening (for example, the second opening). The game ball is easy to enter the first opening (for example, the first opening entrance C22) when it is displaced to the first mode. A distributing member (for example, a distributing member C24) configured such that a game ball can easily enter the second opening (for example, the second open entrance C23) when displaced to the second mode;
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state (for example, a special winning opening C10);
A first main game identification information display portion capable of displaying the first main game identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g);
A second main game identification information display portion capable of displaying the second main game identification information (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An auxiliary game unit (for example, main control board M) that supports the main game;
With
The main game section (for example, main control board M)
First random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering a first main game starting port (for example, a first main game starting port BA12);
After the first main game identification information is variably displayed on the first main game identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the first main game identification information is displayed. First main game identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display the main game identification information,
A second random number acquiring means for acquiring a second random number based on a ball entering a second main game starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10);
After the second main game identification information is variably displayed on the second main game identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second main game identification information is displayed. A second main game identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display the main game identification information,
After the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, is there a predetermined number of balls entering a variable winning opening (for example, a special winning opening C10)? Or a special game control means capable of executing a special game for executing a unit game that can make a variable winning port (for example, a special winning port C10) an advantageous state for a player until a predetermined period elapses;
With
The variable member A (for example, the first non-motorized accessory A12hd) can be opened by entering a first opening (for example, the first opening ball entrance C22),
The variable member B (for example, the second non-electrically-powered accessory B10hd) can be opened by entering a second opening (for example, the second opening entrance C23),
The auxiliary game unit (for example, the main control board M)
Auxiliary game random number acquisition means for acquiring an auxiliary game random number when a game ball enters an auxiliary game start port (for example, an auxiliary game start port H10);
Auxiliary game identification information display control that performs a hit / fail determination based on the auxiliary game random number acquired by the auxiliary game random number acquisition unit, controls the auxiliary game identification information display unit to variably display the auxiliary game identification information, and then stops and displays the auxiliary game identification information. Means,
In the case where the result of the determination as to whether or not the winning is based on the random number of the auxiliary game is a win, the variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) can be displaced after the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed. After displacing the variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) from the closed state to the open state within a certain displacement drive period, one or more operations for displacing the variable member C to the closed state are performed. Easy entry ball game determination executing means for executing the easy entry ball game
With
A low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game identification The probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group has a high probability lottery state in which the probability is higher than the predetermined probability,
In the case of the high probability lottery state, from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display as one unit, counting from the time of the high probability lottery state. Until the unit is performed a predetermined number of times, it is configured to be able to control so as not to be in a low probability lottery state,
As the game state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member C (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d), the normal game state and the variable member C (for example, the second main game start port electric combination) Object B11d) has a specific game state in which the object B11d) is likely to be opened,
In the case of the specific game state, the unit from the start to the stop display of the change display of the first identification information or the start to the stop display of the change display of the second identification information is defined as one unit. Until the unit is performed the first number or the second number, it is configured so that it can be controlled not to be in the normal gaming state,
The second number is larger than the first number,
As the specific game state, the first specific game state and the first specific game state are the displacement modes of the variable member C (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) when the easy ball game is executed. Has a second specific game state that can be different,
It is configured such that the distribution member can be displaced upon execution of the easy entry ball game,
When the easy entry ball game is executed, the distribution member (for example, the distribution member C24) is configured to be displaced to the second mode after maintaining the first mode for a predetermined time,
When the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, the ratio of the second specific game state after the end of the special game executed and the second main game identification information are changed to the predetermined group. It is configured such that the ratio of the second specific game state after the end of the special game executed by being stopped and displayed in the belonging stop display mode is different,
If the first main game identification information enters the specific game state after the end of the special game executed by being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, it is counted from the specific game state. The unit is configured to be in a normal game state by performing the first number of times,
If the second main game identification information enters the specific game state after the end of the special game executed by being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, it is counted from the specific game state. The unit is configured to be in a normal game state when the one unit is performed a second time.
It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by the following.
Also,
Pachinko gaming machines according to this concept (1-3)
A first main game start port (for example, a first main game start port BA12) into which a game ball can enter;
A second main game start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which game balls can enter,
An auxiliary game start port through which game balls can enter (eg, an auxiliary game start port H10);
A distribution ball entrance (for example, a distribution entrance C20) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member attached to a first main game start port (for example, the first main game start port BA12) and displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the first main game start port ( For example, a game ball can enter the first main game start port BA12) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when the ball is displaced to the closed state, the first main game start port (for example, the first main game start port BA12) is started. A variable member A (for example, a first non-motorized accessory A12hd) configured such that the game ball cannot enter the mouth BA12) or is difficult to enter as compared to the open state;
A variable member attached to a second main game start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) and displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the second main game start port ( For example, a game ball can enter the second main game start port B10 or is easier to enter as compared to the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the second main game start port (for example, the second main game start port) A variable member B (for example, a second non-electrically-powered accessory B10hd) configured such that the game ball cannot enter the mouth B10) or is difficult to enter the ball compared to the open state;
A variable member attached to a distributing entrance (for example, distributing entrance C20) and displaceable between an open state and a closed state. The game ball can enter the dispensing ball port C20) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when displaced to the closed state, the game ball is placed in the distributing ball port (for example, the dispensing ball port C20). A variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d), which is configured to be difficult to enter the ball compared to the non-enterable or open state,
A first opening (e.g., a first opening entrance C22) provided downstream of the distribution entrance (e.g., the distribution entrance C20). )When,
A second opening (for example, a second opening entrance C23) provided at a downstream side of the distribution entrance (for example, the distribution entrance C20), which is a entrance where game balls can enter. )When,
The flowing direction of the game ball that has entered the sorting entrance is set to one of the first opening (for example, the first opening entrance C22) and the second opening (for example, the second opening entrance C23). It is a member that changes toward, and when it is displaced to the first mode, the game ball can easily enter the first opening (eg, the first open entrance C22), and when displaced to the second mode, A distributing member (for example, a distributing member C24) configured such that a game ball can easily enter the open opening (for example, the second open ball entrance C23);
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state (for example, a special winning opening C10);
A first main game identification information display portion capable of displaying the first main game identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g);
A second main game identification information display portion capable of displaying the second main game identification information (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An auxiliary game unit (for example, main control board M) that supports the main game;
With
The main game section (for example, main control board M)
First random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering a first main game starting port (for example, a first main game starting port BA12);
After the first main game identification information is variably displayed on the first main game identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the first main game identification information is displayed. First main game identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display the main game identification information,
A second random number acquiring means for acquiring a second random number based on a ball entering a second main game starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10);
After the second main game identification information is variably displayed on the second main game identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second main game identification information is displayed. A second main game identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display the main game identification information,
After the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, is there a predetermined number of balls entering a variable winning opening (for example, a special winning opening C10)? Or a special game control means capable of executing a special game for executing a unit game that can make a variable winning port (for example, a special winning port C10) an advantageous state for a player until a predetermined period elapses;
With
The variable member A (for example, the first non-motorized accessory A12hd) can be opened by entering a first opening (for example, the first opening ball entrance C22),
The variable member B (for example, the second non-electrically-powered accessory B10hd) can be opened by entering a second opening (for example, the second opening entrance C23),
The auxiliary game unit (for example, the main control board M)
Auxiliary game random number acquisition means for acquiring an auxiliary game random number when a game ball enters an auxiliary game start port (for example, an auxiliary game start port H10);
Auxiliary game identification information display control that performs a hit / fail determination based on the auxiliary game random number acquired by the auxiliary game random number acquisition unit, controls the auxiliary game identification information display unit to variably display the auxiliary game identification information, and then stops and displays the auxiliary game identification information. Means,
In the case where the result of the determination as to whether or not the winning is based on the random number of the auxiliary game is a win, the variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) can be displaced after the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed. After displacing the variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) from the closed state to the open state within a certain displacement drive period, one or more operations for displacing the variable member C to the closed state are performed. Easy entry ball game determination executing means for executing the easy entry ball game
With
A low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game identification The probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group has a high probability lottery state in which the probability is higher than the predetermined probability,
In the case of the high probability lottery state, from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display as one unit, counting from the time of the high probability lottery state. Until the unit is performed a predetermined number of times, it is configured to be able to control so as not to be in a low probability lottery state,
As the game state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member C (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d), the normal game state and the variable member C (for example, the second main game start port electric combination) Object B11d) has a specific game state in which the object B11d) is likely to be opened,
In the case of the specific game state, the unit from the start to the stop display of the change display of the first identification information or the start to the stop display of the change display of the second identification information is defined as one unit. Until the unit is performed a specific number of times, it is configured so that it can be controlled not to be in the normal gaming state,
As the specific game state, the first specific game state and the first specific game state are the displacement modes of the variable member C (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) when the easy ball game is executed. Has a second specific game state that can be different,
The distribution member (for example, the distribution member C24) is configured to be able to be displaced upon execution of the easy entry ball game,
When the easy entry ball game is executed, the distribution member (for example, the distribution member C24) is configured to be displaced to the second mode after maintaining the first mode for a predetermined time,
An expected value relating to the number of prize balls given to a player by execution of a special game executed when the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, and a second main game identification It is configured such that the expected value related to the number of prize balls given to the player by execution of the special game executed by the information being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group,
When the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, the ratio of the second specific game state after the end of the special game executed and the second main game identification information are changed to the predetermined group. It is configured such that the rate of the second specific game state after the end of the special game executed by being stopped and displayed in the belonging stop display mode is different.
It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by the following.
Also,
Pachinko gaming machines according to this concept (1-4)
A first main game start port (for example, a first main game start port BA12) into which a game ball can enter;
A second main game start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which game balls can enter,
An auxiliary game start port through which game balls can enter (eg, an auxiliary game start port H10);
A distribution ball entrance (for example, a distribution entrance C20) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member attached to a first main game start port (for example, the first main game start port BA12) and displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the first main game start port ( For example, a game ball can enter the first main game start port BA12) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when the ball is displaced to the closed state, the first main game start port (for example, the first main game start port BA12) is started. A variable member A (for example, a first non-motorized accessory A12hd) configured such that the game ball cannot enter the mouth BA12) or is difficult to enter as compared to the open state;
A variable member attached to a second main game start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) and displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the second main game start port ( For example, a game ball can enter the second main game start port B10 or is easier to enter as compared to the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the second main game start port (for example, the second main game start port) A variable member B (for example, a second non-electrically-powered accessory B10hd) configured such that the game ball cannot enter the mouth B10) or is difficult to enter the ball compared to the open state;
A variable member attached to a distributing entrance (for example, distributing entrance C20) and displaceable between an open state and a closed state. The game ball can enter the dispensing ball port C20) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when displaced to the closed state, the game ball is placed in the distributing ball port (for example, the dispensing ball port C20). A variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d), which is configured to be difficult to enter the ball compared to the non-enterable or open state,
A first opening (e.g., a first opening entrance C22) provided downstream of the distribution entrance (e.g., the distribution entrance C20). )When,
A second opening (for example, a second opening entrance C23) provided at a downstream side of the distribution entrance (for example, the distribution entrance C20), which is a entrance where game balls can enter. )When,
The flow direction of the game ball that has entered the distribution ball entrance (for example, the distribution ball entrance C20) is changed to the first opening (for example, the first opening entrance C22) and the second opening (for example, the second opening). The game ball is easy to enter the first opening (for example, the first opening entrance C22) when it is displaced to the first mode. A distributing member (for example, a distributing member C24) configured such that a game ball can easily enter the second opening (for example, the second open entrance C23) when displaced to the second mode;
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state (for example, a special winning opening C10);
A first main game identification information display portion capable of displaying the first main game identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g);
A second main game identification information display portion capable of displaying the second main game identification information (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An auxiliary game unit (for example, main control board M) that supports the main game;
With
The main game section (for example, main control board M)
First random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering a first main game starting port (for example, a first main game starting port BA12);
After the first main game identification information is variably displayed on the first main game identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the first main game identification information is displayed. First main game identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display the main game identification information,
A second random number acquiring means for acquiring a second random number based on a ball entering a second main game starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10);
After the second main game identification information is variably displayed on the second main game identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second main game identification information is displayed. A second main game identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display the main game identification information,
After the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, is there a predetermined number of balls entering a variable winning opening (for example, a special winning opening C10)? Or a special game control means capable of executing a special game for executing a unit game that can make a variable winning port (for example, a special winning port C10) an advantageous state for a player until a predetermined period elapses;
With
The variable member A (for example, the first non-motorized accessory A12hd) can be opened by entering a first opening (for example, the first opening ball entrance C22),
The variable member B (for example, the second non-electrically-powered accessory B10hd) can be opened by entering a second opening (for example, the second opening entrance C23),
The auxiliary game unit (for example, the main control board M)
Auxiliary game random number acquisition means for acquiring an auxiliary game random number when a game ball enters an auxiliary game start port (for example, an auxiliary game start port H10);
Auxiliary game identification information display control that performs a hit / fail determination based on the auxiliary game random number acquired by the auxiliary game random number acquisition unit, controls the auxiliary game identification information display unit to variably display the auxiliary game identification information, and then stops and displays the auxiliary game identification information. Means,
In the case where the result of the determination as to whether or not the winning is based on the random number of the auxiliary game is a win, the variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) can be displaced after the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed. After displacing the variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) from the closed state to the open state within a certain displacement drive period, one or more operations for displacing the variable member C to the closed state are performed. Easy entry ball game determination executing means for executing the easy entry ball game
With
A low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game identification The probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group has a high probability lottery state in which the probability is higher than the predetermined probability,
In the case of the high probability lottery state, from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display as one unit, counting from the time of the high probability lottery state. Until the unit is performed a predetermined number of times, it is configured to be able to control so as not to be in a low probability lottery state,
As the game state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member C (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d), the normal game state and the variable member C (for example, the second main game start port electric combination) Object B11d) has a specific game state in which the object B11d) is likely to be opened,
In the case of the specific game state, the unit from the start to the stop display of the change display of the first identification information or the start to the stop display of the change display of the second identification information is defined as one unit. Until the unit is performed the first number or the second number, it is configured so that it can be controlled not to be in the normal gaming state,
The second number is larger than the first number,
As the specific game state, the first specific game state and the first specific game state are the displacement modes of the variable member C (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) when the easy ball game is executed. Has a second specific game state that can be different,
The distribution member (for example, the distribution member C24) is configured to be able to be displaced upon execution of the easy entry ball game,
When the easy entry ball game is executed, the distribution member (for example, the distribution member C24) is configured to be displaced to the second mode after maintaining the first mode for a predetermined time,
An expected value relating to the number of prize balls given to a player by execution of a special game executed when the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, and a second main game identification It is configured such that the expected value related to the number of prize balls given to the player by execution of the special game executed by the information being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group,
When the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, the ratio of the second specific game state after the end of the special game executed and the second main game identification information are changed to the predetermined group. It is configured such that the ratio of the second specific game state after the end of the special game executed by being stopped and displayed in the belonging stop display mode is different,
If the first main game identification information enters the specific game state after the end of the special game executed by being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, it is counted from the specific game state. The unit is configured to be in a normal game state by performing the first number of times,
If the second main game identification information enters the specific game state after the end of the special game executed by being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, it is counted from the specific game state. The unit is configured to be in a normal game state when the one unit is performed a second time.
It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by the following.
Also,
Pachinko gaming machines according to this concept (1-5)
A game board (for example, a game area D30);
A game ball distribution unit (for example, a distribution start port unit C50) disposed in an opening formed in a game board (for example, the game area D30);
A first main game start port B (for example, a first main game start port BA12) into which game balls can enter;
An auxiliary game start port through which game balls can enter (eg, an auxiliary game start port H10);
A distribution ball entrance (for example, a distribution entrance C20) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member attached to a first main game start port B (for example, first main game start port BA12) and displaceable between an open state and a closed state. B (e.g., the first main game start port BA12) allows the ball to enter the ball or is easier to enter as compared to the closed state, and when displaced to the closed state, the first main game start port B (e.g., first A variable member A (for example, a first non-motorized accessory A12hd) configured such that a game ball cannot enter the main game start port BA12) or is difficult to enter the ball compared to an open state;
A variable member attached to a distributing entrance (for example, distributing entrance C20) and displaceable between an open state and a closed state. The game ball can enter the dispensing ball port C20) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when displaced to the closed state, the game ball is placed in the distributing ball port (for example, the dispensing ball port C20). A variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d), which is configured to be difficult to enter the ball compared to the non-enterable or open state,
A first opening (e.g., a first opening entrance C22) provided downstream of the distribution entrance (e.g., the distribution entrance C20). )When,
A second opening (for example, a second opening entrance C23) provided at a downstream side of the distribution entrance (for example, the distribution entrance C20), which is a entrance where game balls can enter. )When,
The flow direction of the game ball that has entered the distribution ball entrance (for example, the distribution ball entrance C20) is changed to the first opening (for example, the first opening entrance C22) and the second opening (for example, the second opening). A member that changes toward any one of the open entrances C23), in which the game ball can easily enter the first opening when displaced to the first mode, and the second opening occurs when displaced to the second aspect. A distributing member B (for example, a distributing member C24) configured so that a game ball can easily enter the mouth;
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state (for example, a special winning opening C10);
A first main game identification information display portion capable of displaying the first main game identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g);
A second main game identification information display portion capable of displaying the second main game identification information (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An auxiliary game unit (for example, main control board M) that supports the main game;
With
The game ball distribution unit (for example, the distribution start port unit C50)
A common entrance (e.g., common entrance C51), which is an entrance through which game balls can enter;
A first main game start port A (for example, a first main game start port) which is a ball entrance where game balls can enter and is provided downstream of a common ball entrance (for example, common ball entrance C51). AA10),
A second main game start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) which is a ball entry port where game balls can enter, and is provided downstream from a common ball entry port (for example, common entry port C51). )When,
The flow direction of the game ball that has entered the common entrance (for example, the common entrance C51) is determined by the first main game start port A (for example, the first main game start port AA10) and the second main game start port (for example, the first main game start port AA10). , The second main game starting port B10), and the flowing direction is changed to the first main game starting port A (for example, the first main game starting port AA10) and the second main game starting port AA10. A distributing member A (for example, a starting port distributing member C50y) configured to alternately change toward a mouth (for example, a second main game starting port B10);
A variable member that can be displaced between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, a game ball can enter the second main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) or is compared with the closed state. When the ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) or is difficult to enter as compared to the open state. Variable member B (for example, the second non-motorized accessory B10hd)
With
The main game department
A first random number is obtained based on a ball entering the first main game start port A (for example, the first main game start port AA10) or the first main game start port B (for example, the first main game start port BA12). First random number acquiring means;
After the first main game identification information is variably displayed on the first main game identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the first main game identification information is displayed. First main game identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display the main game identification information,
A second random number acquiring means for acquiring a second random number based on a ball entering a second main game starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10);
On the basis of the second random number acquired by the second random number acquiring means, the second main game identification information is variably displayed on the second main game identification information display unit, and then the second main game identification information is controlled to be stopped and displayed. Two main game identification information display control means,
After the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, is there a predetermined number of balls entering a variable winning opening (for example, a special winning opening C10)? Or a special game control means capable of executing a special game for executing a unit game that can make a variable winning port (for example, a special winning port C10) an advantageous state for a player until a predetermined period elapses;
With
The variable member A (for example, the first non-motorized accessory A12hd) can be opened by entering a first opening (for example, the first opening ball entrance C22),
The variable member B (for example, the second non-electrically-powered accessory B10hd) can be opened by entering a second opening (for example, the second opening entrance C23),
The auxiliary game unit (for example, the main control board M)
Auxiliary game random number acquisition means for acquiring an auxiliary game random number when a game ball enters an auxiliary game start port (for example, an auxiliary game start port H10);
Auxiliary game identification information display control that performs a hit / fail determination based on the auxiliary game random number acquired by the auxiliary game random number acquisition unit, controls the auxiliary game identification information display unit to variably display the auxiliary game identification information, and then stops and displays the auxiliary game identification information. Means,
In the case where the result of the determination as to whether or not the winning is based on the random number of the auxiliary game is a win, the variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) can be displaced after the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed. After displacing the variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) from the closed state to the open state within a certain displacement drive period, one or more operations for displacing the variable member C to the closed state are performed. Easy entry ball game determination executing means for executing the easy entry ball game
With
As the game state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member C (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d), the normal game state and the variable member C (for example, the second main game start port electric combination) Object B11d) has a specific game state in which the object B11d) is likely to be opened,
As the specific game state, the first specific game state and the first specific game state are the displacement modes of the variable member C (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) when the easy ball game is executed. Has a second specific game state that can be different,
The distributing member B (for example, the distributing member C24) is configured to be able to be displaced upon execution of the easy entry ball game,
When the easy entering ball game is executed, the distribution member B (for example, the distribution member C24) is configured to be displaced to the second mode after maintaining the first mode for a predetermined time,
When the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, the ratio of the second specific game state after the end of the special game executed and the second main game identification information are changed to the predetermined group. It is configured such that the rate of the second specific game state after the end of the special game executed by being stopped and displayed in the belonging stop display mode is different.
It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by the following.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured to include an electric accessory (for example, a second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) at a starting port or another entrance, and as a concept based on the configuration, Is
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (2)
Auxiliary game starting port where game balls can enter,
A variable member attached to a predetermined entrance, which can be displaced to an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to an open state, a game ball can enter a predetermined entrance when compared to a closed state. A variable member that is easy to enter and that is configured such that when it is displaced to the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the predetermined entrance port or is difficult to enter compared to the open state,
An auxiliary game identification information display unit capable of displaying auxiliary game identification information,
The auxiliary game department
Auxiliary game random number acquisition means for acquiring an auxiliary game random number when the game ball enters the auxiliary game start port,
Auxiliary game identification information display control that performs a hit / fail determination based on the auxiliary game random number acquired by the auxiliary game random number acquisition unit, controls the auxiliary game identification information display unit to variably display the auxiliary game identification information, and then stops and displays the auxiliary game identification information. Means,
In a case where the result of the determination as to whether or not the auxiliary game is random based on the auxiliary game random number has been won, after the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable member is moved from the closed state within a displacement drive period during which the variable member can be displaced. A pachinko gaming machine comprising: an easy-entering ball game determination executing means for executing an easy-entering ball game in which the operation of displacing to the closed state is performed one or more times after displacing to the open state.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured to include a distribution member that distributes gaming balls to a plurality of entrances, and as a concept based on the configuration,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (3)
A first main game start port (for example, a first main game start port BA12) into which a game ball can enter;
A second main game start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which game balls can enter,
An auxiliary game start port through which game balls can enter (eg, an auxiliary game start port H10);
A distribution ball entrance (for example, a distribution entrance C20) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member attached to a distributing entrance (for example, distributing entrance C20) and displaceable between an open state and a closed state. The game ball can enter the dispensing ball port C20) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when displaced to the closed state, the game ball is placed in the distributing ball port (for example, the dispensing ball port C20). A variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d), which is configured to be difficult to enter the ball compared to the non-enterable or open state,
A first opening (e.g., a first opening entrance C22) provided downstream of the distribution entrance (e.g., the distribution entrance C20). )When,
A second opening (for example, a second opening entrance C23) provided at a downstream side of the distribution entrance (for example, the distribution entrance C20), which is a entrance where game balls can enter. )When,
The flow direction of the game ball that has entered the distribution ball entrance (for example, the distribution ball entrance C20) is changed to the first opening (for example, the first opening entrance C22) and the second opening (for example, the second opening). The game ball is easy to enter the first opening (for example, the first opening entrance C22) when it is displaced to the first mode. A distributing member (for example, a distributing member C24) configured to allow a game ball to easily enter a second opening (for example, a second open entrance C23) when displaced to the second mode. A pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured as described above.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured to include a plurality of non-motorized accessories at the starting port and other entrances, and as a concept based on the configuration,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (4)
A first main game start port (for example, a first main game start port BA12) into which a game ball can enter;
A second main game start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which game balls can enter,
A variable member attached to a first main game start port (for example, the first main game start port BA12) and displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the first main game start port ( For example, a game ball can enter the first main game start port BA12) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when the ball is displaced to the closed state, the first main game start port (for example, the first main game start port BA12) is started. A variable member A (for example, a first non-motorized accessory A12hd) configured such that the game ball cannot enter the mouth BA12) or is difficult to enter as compared to the open state;
A variable member attached to a second main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) and displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the second main game start port ( For example, a game ball can enter the second main game start port B10 or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when the ball is displaced to the closed state, the second main game start port (for example, the second main game start port) The mouth B10) is configured to include a variable member B (for example, the second non-electrically-powered accessory B10hd) in which the game ball is not allowed to enter the ball or is difficult to enter as compared to the open state. It is a pachinko gaming machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may include a plurality of types of auxiliary game time reduction flags, that is, may be configured to include a plurality of auxiliary game time reduction states (or time reduction game states). As a concept based on the configuration,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (6)
The game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member C includes a normal game state and a specific game state in which the variable member C is more likely to be opened than in the normal game state,
The specific game state includes a first specific game state, and a second specific game state in which the displacement state of the variable member C in the case where the easy entry ball game is executed is different from the first specific game state. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by the following.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to this example, the auxiliary game time reduction flag that is turned on after the end of the big hit with the big hit symbol may be different depending on the big hit symbol, that is, the auxiliary game time reduction state (or the time reduction game state) may be different. It may be configured as such, as a concept based on the configuration,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (7)
The game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member C includes a normal game state and a specific game state in which the variable member C is more likely to be opened than in the normal game state,
The specific game state has a first specific game state, and a second specific game state in which the displacement state of the variable member C in the case where the easy entry ball game is executed is different from the first specific game state. ,
When the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, the ratio of the second specific game state after the end of the special game executed and the second main game identification information become the predetermined group. A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the ratio is changed to a second specific game state after the end of the special game executed by being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode to which it belongs.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example, the distribution member is displaced to the second mode after maintaining the first mode for a predetermined time, triggered by the auxiliary game winning (the first opening timing of the electric accessory) (first mode). The opening and opening entrances to be guided are different between the embodiment and the second embodiment), and as a concept based on the configuration,
The pachinko gaming machine according to the concept (10) is:
It is configured such that the distribution member can be displaced upon execution of the easy entry ball game,
In the pachinko gaming machine, when the easy-entering ball game is executed, the distribution member is configured to be displaced to the second mode after maintaining the first mode for a predetermined time.

  In addition, the long opening of the electric accessory shown by "No. 11" in FIG. 1 is an opening for a predetermined time or more, and the short opening of the electric accessory is an opening for a predetermined time or less. A long opening is an opening of 0.5 seconds or more, and a short opening is an opening of 0.3 seconds or less.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example is configured so that the average value of the expected prize ball acquisition value in the big hit on the first main gaming side and the average value of the expected prize ball acquisition value in the big hit on the second main game side are different. As a concept based on the configuration,
The pachinko gaming machine according to the concept (13) is:
An expected value related to the number of prize balls given to the player by the execution of the special game executed by the first main game identification information being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, and the second main game identification The information is configured to be different from an expected value related to the number of prize balls given to a player by execution of a special game executed when information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group. Pachinko game machine.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to this example, the rate at which the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is turned on after the end of the first main game side big hit and the rate at which the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is turned on after the end of the second main game side big hit are turned on. The configuration may be different, and as a concept based on the configuration,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (14)
When the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, the ratio of the second specific game state after the end of the special game executed and the second main game identification information become the predetermined group. A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the ratio is changed to a second specific game state after the end of the special game executed by being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode to which it belongs.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example is
It may be configured such that the auxiliary game time reduction flag A or the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is turned on not depending on the gaming state but only on the big hit symbol, and a concept based on the configuration is determined. as,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (15)
As the game state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member C (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d), the normal game state and the variable member C (for example, the second main game start port electric combination) Object B11d) has a specific game state in which the object B11d) is likely to be opened,
As the specific game state, the first specific game state and the first specific game state are the displacement modes of the variable member C (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) when the easy ball game is executed. Has a second specific game state that can be different,
A ratio of the first specific game state after the end of the special game executed by the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, and the first main game A configuration in which the ratio of the first specific game state after the end of the special game executed by the identification information or the two main game identification information being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to a group different from the predetermined group is different. Has been
In the normal game state, the first specific game state after the end of the special game executed by the first main game identification information or the two main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, In the specific game state, the first main game identification information or the two main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group. A pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured to be the same.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example, the open pattern B of the electric accessory has a relatively higher ease of entering the electric accessory than the open pattern A (the total opening time or the long opening time is longer). (Total open time = sum of one open on the auxiliary game side, the sum of open times when executing one or more open times, long open time = auxiliary game side) In the case of winning once at, the opening time that is the longest when performing one or more opening times), the concept based on the configuration is as follows:
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (16)
As a displacing mode of the variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) when the easy entering ball game is executed, the first displacing mode and the variable member C (for example, And a second displacement mode in which the period during which the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) is in the open state is long, the pachinko game machine having a second displacement mode.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured such that, in the right region of the board, in the order from the upstream, the electric accessory → the second non-electric accessory → the first non-electric accessory → the auxiliary game start port. Concepts based on composition include:
The pachinko gaming machine according to the concept (17) is:
A first main game start port (for example, a first main game start port BA12) into which a game ball can enter;
A second main game start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which game balls can enter,
An auxiliary game start port through which game balls can enter (eg, an auxiliary game start port H10);
A distribution ball entrance (for example, a distribution entrance C20) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member attached to a first main game start port (for example, the first main game start port BA12) and displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the first main game start port ( For example, a game ball can enter the first main game start port BA12) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when the ball is displaced to the closed state, the first main game start port (for example, the first main game start port BA12) is started. A variable member A (for example, a first non-motorized accessory A12hd) configured such that the game ball cannot enter the mouth BA12) or is difficult to enter as compared to the open state;
A variable member attached to a second main game start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) and displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the second main game start port ( For example, a game ball can enter the second main game start port B10 or is easier to enter as compared to the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the second main game start port (for example, the second main game start port) A variable member B (for example, a second non-electrically-powered accessory B10hd) configured such that the game ball cannot enter the mouth B10) or is difficult to enter the ball compared to the open state;
A variable member attached to a distributing entrance (for example, distributing entrance C20) and displaceable between an open state and a closed state. The game ball can enter the dispensing ball port C20) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when displaced to the closed state, the game ball is placed in the distributing ball port (for example, the dispensing ball port C20). A variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d), which is configured to be difficult to enter the ball compared to the non-enterable or open state,
A first opening (e.g., a first opening entrance C22) provided downstream of the distribution entrance (e.g., the distribution entrance C20). )When,
A second opening (for example, a second opening entrance C23) provided at a downstream side of the distribution entrance (for example, the distribution entrance C20), which is a entrance where game balls can enter. )When,
The flow direction of the game ball that has entered the distribution ball entrance (for example, the distribution ball entrance C20) is changed to the first opening (for example, the first opening entrance C22) and the second opening (for example, the second opening). The game ball is easy to enter the first opening (for example, the first opening entrance C22) when it is displaced to the first mode. A distributing member (for example, a distributing member C24) configured such that a game ball can easily enter the second opening (for example, the second open entrance C23) when displaced to the second mode;
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state (for example, a special winning opening C10);
A first main game identification information display portion capable of displaying the first main game identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g);
A second main game identification information display portion capable of displaying the second main game identification information (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An auxiliary game unit (for example, a main control board M) that supports the main game,
As a flow-down route through which game balls flow down in the game area, a first flow-down route and a second flow-down route different from the first flow-down route are provided,
When the game ball flows down the second flow-down route, the variable member A (for example, the first non-motorized character A12hd), the variable member B (for example, the second non-motorized character B10hd), and the variable member C ( For example, it is configured to flow in the vicinity of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d),
As the order in which the game balls flow down the second flow-down route, the variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d), the variable member B (for example, the second non-electric accessory B10hd), A pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured to flow down in the order of a variable member A (for example, a first non-electrically driven accessory A12hd).

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example has a game to the first non-motorized character and the second non-motorized character in a situation where the auxiliary game time reduction flag (the auxiliary game time reduction flag A, the auxiliary game time reduction flag B) is off. Even if there is a ball, it may be configured not to notify an error until there is a predetermined number of balls that are conditions for closing the non-motorized character (the first non-motorized character and the second non-motorized character). An error occurs when the first non-motorized character has a predetermined number of balls, but not when the second non-motorized character has a predetermined number of balls. May be configured), and as a concept based on the configuration,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (18)
When an error determination condition based on a ball entry situation into the first main game start port (for example, the first main game start port BA12) or the second main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) is satisfied. Comprises error determining means for determining that an error has occurred,
When the first variable member is in an open state, the first entrance is configured to be in a closed state by a predetermined number of entrances to the first entrance,
When the second variable member is in the open state, the second ball entrance is configured to be closed by a specific number of balls entering the second ball entrance,
In the normal game state, it is configured to determine that an error has occurred when there is the predetermined number of balls in the first ball entrance,
A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to determine that an error has occurred when the specific number of balls entered the second entrance in a normal gaming state.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment may be configured to have a big hit symbol that shifts to the probability varying gaming state after the big hit has ended and a big hit symbol that shifts to the non-probability varying gaming state. In addition, it may be configured to have a plurality of types of large-variable big hit symbols, which are big hit symbols that will shift to the probability variation gaming state after the big hit end. In addition, the ratio of the probable big hit B in the probable big hit on the second main game side may be configured to be higher than the ratio of the probable big hit B in the probable big hit on the first main game side. As a concept based on the configuration,
The pachinko gaming machine according to the concept (19) is:
As a special game, a special game A that is in a high-probability lottery state after the special game and is in the first specific game state, and a special game B that is in a high-probability lottery state after the special game and is in the second specific game state, And a special game C which is in a low probability lottery state after the end of the special game.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment may be configured such that the ratio of the probable big hit B in the probable big hit on the second main gaming side is higher than the ratio of the probable big hit B in the probable big hit on the first main gaming side. The concept based on
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (22)
When the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, the game is in the high-probability lottery state after the end of the special game executed, and the second specification is performed. The ratio of the game state is the high probability lottery when the special game executed after the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group and the special game is executed. A pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured to be in a state and a ratio smaller than a second specific game state.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example is configured such that the average value of the expected prize ball acquisition value in the probability change jackpot of the second main gaming side is larger than the average value of the expected prize ball acquisition value in the probability change jackpot of the first main game side. The concept based on the configuration may be
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (23)
When the special game executed by stopping the first main game identification information in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is the special game A or the special game B, the execution of the special game A or the special game B The expected value related to the number of prize balls awarded to the player is that the special game executed when the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is the special game A or the special game. In the case of B, the pachinko gaming machine is configured to be smaller than an expected value relating to the number of prize balls given to the player by executing the special game A or the special game B.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured so that the stay stages are different depending on the auxiliary game time reduction flag that is turned on, and as a concept based on the configuration,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (24)
The game state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member includes a normal game state and a specific game state in which the variable member C (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) is more likely to be opened than in the normal game state. Yes,
As the specific game state, the first specific game state and the first specific game state are the displacement modes of the variable member C (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) when the easy ball game is executed. Has a second specific game state that can be different,
It has at least a first stay stage and a second stay stage that is a stay stage different from the first stay stage as stay stages that can be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
It is configured such that the display tendency of the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) is different due to the different stay stages,
In the first specific game state, the stay stage is configured to be the first stay stage,
A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the stay stage can be the second stay stage in the second specific gaming state.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured such that the stay stage immediately after the end of the jackpot and the jackpot that is not the probability jackpot are the same in a part of the jackpot that becomes the probability jackpot B. As a concept based on the configuration,
The pachinko gaming machine according to the concept (25)
A low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game identification The probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group has a high probability lottery state in which the probability is higher than the predetermined probability,
As a special game, it has at least a special game A that is in a high probability lottery state after the special game and is in the second specific game state, and a special game C that is in a low probability lottery state after the special game,
The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the stay stage is the same after the end of the special game A and after the end of the special game C.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment may be configured to always transition to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the big hit, and to end the probability variation gaming state by the number of symbol changes after the end of the big hit, as a concept based on the configuration. ,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (26)
From the start to the stop display of the first identification information change display or the start of the change display of the second identification information as one unit, the number of repetitions of the one unit is a predetermined number of times since the high probability lottery state after the end of the special game. A pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured to be in a low-probability lottery state in the event of becoming a game.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment may be configured such that the number of time savings on the first main gaming side is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times, while the number of time savings on the second main gaming side is a predetermined number of times. as,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (28)
The first main game identification information is assigned to the predetermined group as compared to the case where the high probability lottery state is set after the end of the special game executed by the second main game identification information being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group. If the high probability lottery state is entered after the end of the special game executed by the stop display mode belonging to the stop display mode, the predetermined number of times is smaller, or the second main game identification information is in a predetermined group. When the high probability lottery state is entered after the end of the special game executed by being stopped and displayed in the belonging stop display mode, and when the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined number of times is the same as that in the case of entering the high-probability lottery state after the end of the special game executed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is configured such that the first main gaming side has a probable big hit A and a probable big hit B, while the second main gaming side has a probable big hit B and does not have the probable big hit A. May be (the second main game side may have a higher probability of the probability change big hit B in the big hit than the first main game side), as a concept based on the configuration,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (29)
After the end of the special game executed by the first main game identification information being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, it is possible to be in the high probability lottery state and the first specific game state, or It is configured to be in a high probability lottery state and to be in the second specific game state,
After the end of the special game executed by the second main game identification information being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, it is possible to enter the high probability lottery state and the second specific game state, A pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured to be in a probability lottery state and not to be in a first specific gaming state.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to this example, if the number of consecutive wins of the big hit in the situation of the probability fluctuation gaming state reaches a predetermined number (probable change upper limit value), the non-probability fluctuation after the end of the predetermined number of big hits It may be configured to be in a gaming state, and as a concept based on the configuration,
The pachinko gaming machine according to the concept (30) is:
A low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and a stop where the first identification information or the second identification information belongs to the predetermined group. Has a high probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in the display mode is higher than the predetermined probability,
The game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member includes a normal game state and a specific game state in which the variable member is more likely to be opened than in the normal game state,
The fact that the special game is executed when the high probability lottery state is set as one unit is set to be a low probability lottery state and a specific game state when the one unit is repeated a predetermined number of times. It is a pachinko game machine.

Pachinko gaming machine according to this example, the average value of the number of times reduced in the time shortened gaming state shifted to after the end of the jackpot that is the probability change upper limit, the jackpot is the big hit of the first main game side or the second main game side It may be configured to be different depending on whether it is a big hit, and as a concept based on the configuration,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (31)
A low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and a stop where the first identification information or the second identification information belongs to the predetermined group. Has a high probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in the display mode is higher than the predetermined probability,
The game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member includes a normal game state and a specific game state in which the variable member is more likely to be opened than in the normal game state,
When the special game is executed as one unit when the high probability lottery state is set, the low probability lottery state and the specific game state are configured when the one unit is repeated a predetermined number of times.
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one unit. It is configured to be in the normal game state when it becomes,
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the high-probability lottery state, the special game is executed, and the specific number of times in the low-probability lottery state and the specific game state after the end of the special game is specified. Number of times A,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the high-probability lottery state, the special game is executed, and the specific number of times in the low-probability lottery state and the specific game state after the end of the special game is specified. When the number of times is B,
A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the specific number B is larger than the specific number A.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured to execute a lottery for shifting from the probability-variable gaming state to the non-probability-variable gaming state for each change in the main game symbol, and as a concept based on the configuration,
The pachinko gaming machine according to the concept (32) is:
A low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and a stop where the first identification information or the second identification information belongs to the predetermined group. Has a high probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in the display mode is higher than the predetermined probability,
The game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member includes a normal game state and a specific game state in which the variable member is more likely to be opened than in the normal game state,
A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to a low-probability lottery state every time the identification information is changed in the high-probability lottery state.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment may be configured such that the average value of the number of time savings after the end of the big hit is different between the big hit on the first main gaming side and the big hit on the second main gaming side. as,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (33)
The game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member includes a normal game state and a specific game state in which the variable member is more likely to be opened than in the normal game state,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one unit. It is configured to be in the normal game state when it becomes,
The specific number of times after the end of the special game executed by the first main game identification information being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a specific number of times A,
When the specific number of times after the end of the special game executed by the second main game identification information being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a specific number of times B,
A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the specific number B is larger than the specific number A.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured to enter a specific area C22 during a big hit and to shift to a probability variation gaming state after the big hit is completed (also referred to as a ball game machine). as,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (34)
A starting port (for example, a first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state (for example, a first winning opening C10);
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball entering the variable winning opening can enter;
An identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display device A20) capable of displaying identification information,
Random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on a ball entering a starting port (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
Applicability determination means for performing the applicability determination based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means,
Identification information display content determining means for determining the stop identification information of the identification information based on the result of the determination by the determination section;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determining means, the identification information is displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display device A20) in a variable manner, and then the identification information is stopped and the identification information is stopped. Identification information display control means,
If the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination means is a winning and the stop identification information of the identification information stopped and displayed on the identification information display section is the specific stop identification information belonging to the specific group, a special game advantageous to the player is provided. Special game control means to be executed;
A normal game state and a specific game state in which a ball can be more easily entered into a start port (for example, the first main game start port A10) than in the normal game state, and control is performed such that the specific game state is set after completion of execution of the special game. Game state transition control means,
Having a plurality of types of specific stop identification information as specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group in the specific group,
Having a plurality of types of specific stop identification information as specific stop identification information belonging to a second specific group in the specific group,
Even if any of the plurality of types of specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group is stopped and displayed, the execution contents of the special game are the same as each other,
Even if any of the plurality of types of specific stop identification information belonging to the second specific group is stopped and displayed, the execution contents of the special game are the same as each other,
When one of the multiple types of specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group is stopped and displayed, and when any of the multiple types of specific stop identification information belonging to the second specific group is stopped and displayed. In, special game execution content is configured to be different from each other,
During the execution of the special game, the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10) remains until a predetermined number of balls have entered the variable winning opening (for example, the first winning opening C10) or a predetermined time has elapsed. ) Can be executed in a unit game in which the player is in an advantageous state,
The ease of entering a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) in the unit game in the special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group is determined by the specific stop identification information belonging to the second specific group. A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be higher in ease of entering a specific area (for example, specific area C22) in a unit game in a corresponding special game.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to this example, the big hit of the second main gaming side is longer than the big hit of the first main gaming side. May be configured to be high, and as a concept based on the configuration,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (35)
In the case where the result of the success / failure determination by the second success / failure determination means is a winning and the stop identification information of the second identification information is stopped and displayed, the result of the success / failure determination by the first success / failure determination means is a winning and the first The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group is relatively easily stopped and displayed as compared with the case where the stop identification information of the identification information is stopped and displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment may be configured to have a plurality of types of long-opening big hits (a type of the time-saving gaming state after the end of the big hit may be different depending on the type of the long-opening big hit). May be used), and as a concept based on the configuration,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (36)
A pachinko gaming machine characterized by having a plurality of types of specific stop identification information as specific stop identification information belonging to a first specific group in a specific group.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured such that the first main gaming side has a higher winning probability of small hits than the second main gaming side, and as a concept based on the configuration,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (37)
The first starting port where game balls can enter,
A second starting port into which game balls can enter,
With a variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
A first random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port,
A first right / wrong determination unit that performs a first right / wrong determination based on the first random number,
First identification information display content determining means for determining the first stop identification information of the first identification information based on the result of the first right / wrong determination,
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determining means, the first identification information display section variably displays the first identification information, and then controls the first stop identification information to stop display. When,
A second random number acquiring unit that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port,
A second right / wrong determination unit that performs a second right / wrong determination based on the second random number,
Based on the result of the second validity determination, the second identification information display content determining means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information,
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determining means, after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display unit, the second identification information display control means controls to stop display the second stop identification information. When,
If the result of the first success / failure determination or the second success / failure determination is a win, the first stop identification information or the second stop identification information is stopped at the first main game identification information display portion or the second main game identification information display portion. Special game control means for executing a special game that can be changed to a state in which the variable winning opening is advantageous to the player after being displayed,
During the execution of the special game, a unit game in which the variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player is executed only once until a predetermined number of balls or a predetermined time elapses in the variable winning opening. ,
The pachinko game, wherein a ratio at which the special game is executed based on the result of the second right / wrong judgment is lower than a ratio at which the special game is executed based on the result of the first right / wrong judgment. Machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment may be configured to have a distribution start port unit for distributing game balls alternately to a first main game start port and a second main game start port, and as a concept based on the configuration, ,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (38)
A game board (for example, a game area D30);
A game ball distribution unit (for example, a distribution start port unit C50) disposed in an opening formed in a game board (for example, the game area D30);
A first main game start port B (for example, a first main game start port BA12) into which game balls can enter;
An auxiliary game start port through which game balls can enter (eg, an auxiliary game start port H10);
A distribution ball entrance (for example, a distribution entrance C20) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member attached to a first main game start port B (for example, first main game start port BA12) and displaceable between an open state and a closed state. B (e.g., the first main game start port BA12) allows the ball to enter the ball or is easier to enter as compared to the closed state, and when displaced to the closed state, the first main game start port B (e.g., first A variable member A (for example, a first non-motorized accessory A12hd) configured such that a game ball cannot enter the main game start port BA12) or is difficult to enter the ball compared to an open state;
A variable member attached to a distributing entrance (for example, distributing entrance C20) and displaceable between an open state and a closed state. The game ball can enter the dispensing ball port C20) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when displaced to the closed state, the game ball is placed in the distributing ball port (for example, the dispensing ball port C20). A variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d), which is configured to be difficult to enter the ball compared to the non-enterable or open state,
A first opening (e.g., a first opening entrance C22) provided downstream of the distribution entrance (e.g., the distribution entrance C20). )When,
A second opening (for example, a second opening entrance C23) provided at a downstream side of the distribution entrance (for example, the distribution entrance C20), which is a entrance where game balls can enter. )When,
The flow direction of the game ball that has entered the distribution ball entrance (for example, the distribution ball entrance C20) is changed to the first opening (for example, the first opening entrance C22) and the second opening (for example, the second opening). A member that changes toward any one of the open entrances C23), in which the game ball can easily enter the first opening when displaced to the first mode, and the second opening occurs when displaced to the second aspect. A distributing member B (for example, a distributing member C24) configured so that a game ball can easily enter the mouth;
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state (for example, a special winning opening C10);
A first main game identification information display portion capable of displaying the first main game identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g);
A second main game identification information display portion capable of displaying the second main game identification information (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An auxiliary game unit (for example, a main control board M) that supports the main game,
The game ball distribution unit (for example, the distribution start port unit C50)
A common entrance (e.g., common entrance C51), which is an entrance through which game balls can enter;
A first main game start port A (for example, a first main game start port) which is a ball entrance where game balls can enter and is provided downstream of a common ball entrance (for example, common ball entrance C51). AA10),
A second main game start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) which is a ball entry port where game balls can enter, and is provided downstream from a common ball entry port (for example, common entry port C51). )When,
The flow direction of the game ball that has entered the common entrance (for example, the common entrance C51) is determined by the first main game start port A (for example, the first main game start port AA10) and the second main game start port (for example, the first main game start port AA10). , The second main game starting port B10), and the flowing direction is changed to the first main game starting port A (for example, the first main game starting port AA10) and the second main game starting port AA10. A distributing member A (for example, a starting port distributing member C50y) configured to alternately change toward a mouth (for example, a second main game starting port B10);
A variable member that can be displaced between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, a game ball can enter the second main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) or is compared with the closed state. When the ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) or is difficult to enter as compared to the open state. And a variable member B (for example, a second non-electric accessory B10hd).

The pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment may be configured such that the probability variation gaming state can be ended by the symbol variation number, and the probability variation number and the time saving number may be different, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko gaming machines according to this concept (40-1)
A first starting port (for example, a first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which game balls can enter,
A variable member attached to a second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) and displaceable between an open state and a closed state. The game ball can enter the main game start port B10) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when displaced to the closed state, the game ball is set in the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). A variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured to be difficult to enter the ball compared to the non-enterable or open state,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state (for example, a first winning opening C10, a second winning opening C20);
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g);
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information,
First random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering a first starting port (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
Based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquiring means, after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display unit, the first identification information display control means controls to stop and display the first identification information. When,
Second random number acquiring means for acquiring a second random number based on a ball entering a second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10);
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquiring means, the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display unit, and the second identification information display control means controls to stop displaying the second identification information. When,
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, a predetermined number of variable winning openings (for example, the first winning opening C10 and the second winning opening C20) are provided. Until a ball is entered or a predetermined period elapses, a special game is executed in which a variable winning port (for example, the first winning port C10 or the second winning port C20) is executed in a unit game that can make the player an advantageous state. Special game control means that is possible,
A low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and a stop where the first identification information or the second identification information belongs to the predetermined group. Has a high probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in the display mode is higher than the predetermined probability,
As a game state related to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d), the normal game state and a variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) which are more variable than the normal game state. ) Has a specific game state that is likely to be open,
In the case of the high probability lottery state, from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display as one unit, counting from the time of the high probability lottery state. Until the unit is performed a predetermined number of times, it is configured to be able to control so as not to be in a low probability lottery state,
In the case of the specific game state, the unit from the start to the stop display of the change display of the first identification information or the start to the stop display of the change display of the second identification information is defined as one unit. Until the unit is performed the first number or the second number, it is configured so that it can be controlled not to be in the normal gaming state,
The second number is larger than the first number,
It is a high-probability lottery state and a specific game state, and the last round of the specific game state when the unit is in the normal game state by performing the first unit the first number of times since the specific game state. In the configuration, the second identification information is configured such that the average value of the variable display period of the second identification information belonging to a group other than the predetermined group is the average value A,
It is a high-probability lottery state and is a specific game state, and the last round of the specific game state in the case of being in the normal game state due to the one unit being performed a second number of times starting from the time of the specific game state Wherein the average value of the second identification information belonging to a group other than the predetermined group in the variable display period is an average value B different from the average value A. It is a pachinko gaming machine.
Also,
Pachinko gaming machines according to this concept (40-2)
A starting port through which game balls can enter (for example, a second main game starting port B10);
A variable member attached to a start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) and displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to an open state, a start port (for example, a second main game start port). B10) can enter a ball or is easier to enter as compared to a closed state, and when displaced to a closed state, cannot enter or open a game ball at a starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10). A variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) configured to be difficult to enter the ball compared to the state,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state (for example, a first winning opening C10, a second winning opening C20);
An identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information,
Random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on a ball entering a starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10);
Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g) based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means. When,
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, there is a predetermined number of balls in a variable winning opening (for example, the first winning opening C10, the second winning opening C20) or a predetermined number of entering balls. Special game control means capable of executing a special game for executing a unit game in which a variable winning port (for example, a first winning port C10, a second winning port C20) can be set in an advantageous state for a player until a period elapses. With
The low probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode that belongs to the predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability Also has a high probability lottery state with a high probability,
As a game state related to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d), the normal game state and a variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) which are more variable than the normal game state. ) Has a specific game state that is likely to be open,
In the case of the high probability lottery state, from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display as one unit, counting from the time of the high probability lottery state. Until the unit is performed a predetermined number of times, it is configured to be able to control so as not to be in a low probability lottery state,
In the case of the specific game state, the unit from the start to the stop display of the change display of the first identification information or the start to the stop display of the change display of the second identification information is defined as one unit. Until the unit is performed the first number or the second number, it is configured so that it can be controlled not to be in the normal gaming state,
The first number is equal to the predetermined number or equal to or more than the predetermined number,
The second number is less than the predetermined number,
A variable period state transition that has a plurality of variable period states in which the average values of the variable display periods of the identification information are different, and controls to change from a certain variable period state to a different variable period state. Is configured to be executable,
Until the one unit is performed the first number of times from the time when the specific gaming state is reached, in the case where the normal gaming state is not set, the high probability lottery state and the specific gaming state until the gaming state ends The number of times of the fluctuation period state transition to be executed is the first fluctuation period state transition number,
Until the one unit is performed a second number of times from the time when the specific game state is reached, in the case where the normal game state is not performed, the high probability lottery state and the game state which is the specific game state ends. In the case where the number of times of the fluctuating period state transition to be executed is the second number of fluctuating period state transitions,
A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the first transition period state transition number and the second transition period state transition number can be different.
Also,
Pachinko gaming machines according to this concept (40-3)
A starting port through which game balls can enter (for example, a second main game starting port B10);
A variable member attached to a start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) and displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to an open state, a start port (for example, a second main game start port). B10) can enter a ball or is easier to enter as compared to a closed state, and when displaced to a closed state, cannot enter or open a game ball at a starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10). A variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) configured to be difficult to enter the ball compared to the state,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state (for example, a first winning opening C10, a second winning opening C20);
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) for controlling the production display on the production display unit (for example, the production display device SG),
The main game section (for example, main control board M)
Random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on a ball entering a starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10);
When a random number is obtained by the random number obtaining means, the obtained random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and a random number temporary storing means for controlling the occurrence of a hold,
When the variable display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, control is performed such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display unit based on the random number related to the certain hold, and then the identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means,
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, there is a predetermined number of balls in a variable winning opening (for example, the first winning opening C10, the second winning opening C20) or a predetermined number of entering balls. Special game control means capable of executing a special game for executing a unit game in which a variable winning port (for example, a first winning port C10, a second winning port C20) can be set in an advantageous state for a player until a period elapses. With
The low probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode that belongs to the predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability Also has a high probability lottery state with a high probability,
As a game state related to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d), the normal game state and a variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) which are more variable than the normal game state. ) Has a specific game state that is likely to be open,
The sub game unit (for example, sub control board S)
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M);
Effect display content control means capable of controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
It has a plurality of stay stages as stay stages depending upon controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
It is configured such that the display tendency of the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) is different due to the different stay stages,
It is configured such that the stay stage in the case of the high probability lottery state and the specific game state is different from the stay stage in the case of the low probability lottery state and the specific game state,
It is configured to be able to execute a hold look-ahead effect, which is an effect that suggests the feasibility of a special game related to a certain hold,
A pachinko game characterized in that the same prefetching effect can be executed in the high probability lottery state and the specific game state, and in the low probability lottery state and the specific game state. Machine.
Also,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (40-4)
A first starting port (for example, a first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which game balls can enter,
A variable member attached to a second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) and displaceable between an open state and a closed state. The game ball can enter the main game start port B10) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when displaced to the closed state, the game ball is set in the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). A variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured to be difficult to enter the ball compared to the non-enterable or open state,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state (for example, a first winning opening C10, a second winning opening C20);
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g);
A second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) for controlling the production display on the production display unit (for example, the production display device SG),
The main game section (for example, main control board M)
First random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering a first starting port (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
The first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, and then the first identification information is stopped. First identification information display control means for controlling to display,
Second random number acquiring means for acquiring a second random number based on a ball entering a second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10);
The second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition unit, and then the second identification information is stopped. Second identification information display control means for controlling to display,
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, a predetermined number of variable winning openings (for example, the first winning opening C10 and the second winning opening C20) are provided. Until a ball is entered or a predetermined period elapses, a special game is executed in which a variable winning port (for example, the first winning port C10 or the second winning port C20) is executed in a unit game that can make the player an advantageous state. Special game control means that is possible,
A low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and a stop where the first identification information or the second identification information belongs to the predetermined group. Has a high probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in the display mode is higher than the predetermined probability,
As a game state related to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d), the normal game state and a variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) which are more variable than the normal game state. ) Has a specific game state that is likely to be open,
When the special game is executed as one unit when the high probability lottery state is set, the low probability lottery state and the specific game state are configured when the one unit is repeated a predetermined number of times.
If it is a specific game state, it is configured so that it can be controlled not to be in a normal game state until a predetermined condition is satisfied,
A first variable period state in which the average value of the variable display period of the identification information is the first period, and a second variable period in which the average value of the variable display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period A period state, and control to be able to be the first variable period state in a specific period in the specific game state after the end of the execution of the special game, and in the first variable period state, until the specific condition is satisfied. , Is configured to be controlled so as not to be in the second fluctuation period state,
The unit from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or the unit from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information is configured to be executed at least once in the specific period. ,
It has a plurality of types of stop display mode as a stop display mode belonging to a first predetermined group in the predetermined group,
It has a plurality of types of stop display modes as a stop display mode belonging to a second predetermined group in the predetermined group,
A period until the predetermined condition is satisfied when a specific game state is set after the end of the special game executed by any one of the plurality of types of stop display modes belonging to the first predetermined group is stopped and displayed. A period until the predetermined condition is satisfied in a case where a specific game state is set after the end of the special game executed when any of the plurality of types of stop display modes belonging to the second predetermined group is stopped and displayed. Is configured to be relatively short-lived,
The sub game unit (for example, sub control board S)
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M);
Effect display content control means capable of controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
It has a plurality of stay stages as stay stages depending upon controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
It is configured such that the display tendency of the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) is different due to the different stay stages,
A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that a staying stage in a high-probability lottery state and a specific gaming state and a staying stage in a low-probability lottery state and a specific gaming state are configured to be the same.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured such that the staying stage is different between the probability varying gaming state and the time shortening gaming state and the non-probability varying gaming state and the time reducing gaming state, and as a concept based on the configuration, ,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (41)
A pachinko gaming machine wherein the staying stage in the high-probability lottery state and the specific gaming state is different from the staying stage in the low-probability lottery state and the specific gaming state. It is.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example wins the big hit on the first main gaming side in the probability varying gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state, thereby shifting to the probability varying gaming state and the time shortening gaming state to be shifted after the end of the big hit. The staying stage may be configured to be the staying stage A, and as a concept based on the structure,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (42)
In the case of the high probability lottery state and the normal game state, the special game is executed by the stop display of the first identification information in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, and in the high probability lottery state The stay stage after the end of the special game is different from the case where the special game is executed when the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group when the game is in the specific game state. A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to:

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example has a probability variation gaming state when the number of probable changes ≧ the number of time savings, and a variation time of the final variation of the time-reduced gaming state, and a probability variation gaming state and time when the number of probabilities of variation <the number of time savings. The fluctuation time of the final fluctuation of the shortened game state may be configured to have a different tendency (an average value of the fluctuation time, whether or not the fluctuation time differs depending on the number of holdings, a production mode, and the like), and a concept based on the configuration. as,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (43)
The unit from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the start of the variable display of the second identification information from the start to the stop display is defined as one unit, and the number of repetitions of the one unit is predetermined after the high probability lottery state is set after the end of the special game. It is configured to be in a low probability lottery state when the number of times is reached,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one unit. It is configured to be in the normal game state when it becomes,
In the case of the high probability lottery state and the specific game state, wherein the predetermined number of times is larger than the specific number of times, in the last round of the specific game state, the second identification information belongs to a group other than the predetermined group. The average value of the information fluctuation display period is configured to be the average value A,
In the case of the high probability lottery state and the specific game state, wherein the predetermined number of times is less than the specific number of times, in the last round of the specific game state, the second identification information belongs to a group other than the predetermined group. A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the average value of the information fluctuation display period is configured to be an average value B different from the average value A.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured such that the stay stage in the probability-variable gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state is the same as the stay stage in the non-probability-variable gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state. The concept is based on
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (45)
A pachinko game wherein the staying stage in the high probability lottery state and the specific game state is the same as the staying stage in the low probability lottery state and the specific game state. Machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example is configured such that the variation mode determination tables referred to when determining the variation time in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state and the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state are the same. The concept based on the configuration may be
The pachinko gaming machine according to the concept (46)
A low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and a stop where the first identification information or the second identification information belongs to the predetermined group. Has a high probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in the display mode is higher than the predetermined probability,
The game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member includes a normal game state and a specific game state in which the variable member is more likely to be opened than in the normal game state,
A table referred to when determining the change display time of the identification information in the high probability lottery state and the specific game state, and the identification information in the low probability lottery state and the specific game state. A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that a table referred to when determining a variable display time is configured to be the same.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment may be configured such that the tables referred to when determining the change time in the probability change game state and the time reduction game state and the non-probability change game state and the time reduction game state are different. , As a concept based on the configuration,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (47)
A low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and a stop where the first identification information or the second identification information belongs to the predetermined group. Has a high probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in the display mode is higher than the predetermined probability,
The game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member includes a normal game state and a specific game state in which the variable member is more likely to be opened than in the normal game state,
A table referred to when determining the change display time of the identification information in the high probability lottery state and the specific game state, and the identification information in the low probability lottery state and the specific game state. A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be different from a table referred to when determining a variable display time.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example is configured such that the number of times the table referred to when determining the change time is smaller in the probability change game state and the time reduction game state than in the non-probability change game state and the time reduction game state. The concept based on the configuration may be
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (48)
A variable period state transition that has a plurality of variable period states in which the average values of the variable display periods of the identification information are different, and controls to change from a certain variable period state to a different variable period state. Is configured to be executable,
After the end of the special game, the game is in the high-probability lottery state and the specific game state, and is higher than the number of times of the fluctuation period state transition executed until the game state in the high-probability lottery state and the specific game state ends. After the end of the game, the state is in the low-probability lottery state and the specific game state, and the number of times of the fluctuation period state transition executed until the end of the game state in the low-probability lottery state and the specific game state is relative. A pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured to increase the number of pachinko machines.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example has a probability-variable gaming state when the number of probable changes ≥ the number of time savings, and a limited frequency table transition for referring to the time-reduced gaming state; The limited frequency table transition referred to in the time reduction game state is the tendency ｛table transition frequency, execution rate of reach fluctuation (the execution rate of reach fluctuation is the probability fluctuation game state and the time reduction game state when the probability change number ≧ the number of time savings) Is compared with the table that is referred to for the longest period, and the table that is referred to for the longest period in the probability-variable game state and the time-reduced game state when the number of probabilities of change is less than the number of times saved). May be configured as a concept based on the configuration,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (49)
A low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and a stop where the first identification information or the second identification information belongs to the predetermined group. Has a high probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in the display mode is higher than the predetermined probability,
As a game state related to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d), the normal game state and a variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) which are more variable than the normal game state. ) Has a specific game state that is likely to be open,
When the special game is in the high probability lottery state and the specific game state after the end of the special game, and the predetermined number of times is equal to or more than the specific number of times, the game state in the high probability lottery state and the specific game state ends. The number of times of the fluctuating period state transition executed until the first fluctuating period state transition times,
When the special game is in the high-probability lottery state and the specific game state after the end of the special game, and the predetermined number of times is less than the specific number of times, the gaming state in which the high-probability lottery state is in the specific game state is In the case where the number of times of the fluctuating period state transition executed until the end is the second number of fluctuating period state transitions,
A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the first transition period state transition number and the second transition period state transition number can be different.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment may be configured to have a plurality of time saving times, and as a concept based on the configuration,
The pachinko gaming machine according to the concept (50) is:
The game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member includes a normal game state and a specific game state in which the variable member is more likely to be opened than in the normal game state,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one unit. It is configured to be in the normal game state when it becomes,
A pachinko gaming machine characterized by having at least a specific number A and a specific number B which is a specific number different from the specific number A as the specific number.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment may be configured to be able to execute the same prefetching effect in the probability-variable gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state and the non-probability-variable gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state. Conceptually,
The pachinko gaming machine according to the concept (51) is:
A low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and a stop where the first identification information or the second identification information belongs to the predetermined group. Has a high probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in the display mode is higher than the predetermined probability,
As a game state related to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d), the normal game state and a variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) which are more variable than the normal game state. ) Has a specific game state that is likely to be open,
It is configured to be able to execute a hold look-ahead effect, which is an effect that suggests the feasibility of a special game related to a certain hold,
A pachinko game characterized in that the same prefetching effect can be executed in the high probability lottery state and the specific game state, and in the low probability lottery state and the specific game state. Machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example is a probability varying gaming state and a time shortening gaming state to a non-probability varying gaming state and a time reducing gaming state (from a non-probability varying gaming state and a time reducing gaming state to a probability varying gaming state and a time reducing gaming state). ) May be configured not to be executed across the look-ahead effect when shifting to
The pachinko gaming machine according to the concept (52) is:
A main game section for controlling the progress of the game,
A starting port that allows game balls to enter,
A variable member attached to the starting port, which can be displaced to an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, a game ball can easily enter the starting port compared to the closed or open state. When displaced to the closed state, a variable member that is configured so that the game ball cannot enter the starting port or is difficult to enter the ball compared to the open state,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
An effect display unit capable of displaying effects,
A sub-game unit for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
Random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on a ball entering the starting port,
A propriety judging means for executing a propriety judgment based on the random number,
When a random number is obtained by the random number obtaining means, the obtained random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and a random number temporary storing means for controlling the occurrence of a hold,
When the variable display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, control is performed such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display unit and then the identification information is stopped and displayed according to the determination content based on the random number related to the certain hold. Identification information display control means,
If the result of the winning determination is a winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the main game identification information display unit, a special game control means for executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening an advantageous state for the player. With
The sub game department,
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game unit side,
On the basis of the game information received by the game information receiving means, comprising effect display content control means capable of controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
A low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and a stop where the first identification information or the second identification information belongs to the predetermined group. Has a high probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in the display mode is higher than the predetermined probability,
As a game state related to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d), the normal game state and a variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) which are more variable than the normal game state. ) Has a specific game state that is likely to be open,
It is configured to be able to execute a hold look-ahead effect, which is an effect that suggests the feasibility of a special game related to a certain hold,
The pending look-ahead effect is a high-probability lottery state and is configured to be unexecutable from a gaming state that is a specific game state to a low-probability lottery state and a game state that is a specific game state. It is a gaming machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example has a limited frequency state A that refers to the limited frequency table A and a limited frequency state B that refers to the limited frequency table B in a gaming machine in which the limited frequency table transitions in the time reduction gaming state. If exists,
(1) In the limited frequency state B, when the number of holds is the first number of holds (for example, 0), the average value of the variation time of the symbol change that causes a loss and the number of holds is the second number of hold (for example, 3). In this case, a difference between the average value of the fluctuation times of the symbol fluctuations, which is a loss, occurs in a predetermined period.
(2) In the limited frequency state A, when the number of holds is the first number of holds (for example, 0), the average value of the fluctuation time of the symbol change that causes loss, and the number of holds is the second number of hold (for example, 3) In this case, there is no difference between the average value of the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation which is a loss and the average value in the predetermined period.
(3) The second hold number (for example, three) in the limited frequency state B is the most selected than the variation time that is the most likely to be lost in the second hold number (for example, three) in the limited frequency state A The fluctuating time, which is more likely to cause loss, is longer.
(4) The limited frequency state B stays for a longer period (the number of changes) than the limited frequency state A.
(5) Specific effects that can be displayed in the limited frequency state B are not displayed in the limited frequency state A.
(6) When the game is in the time-saving game state, the prefetch effect relating to the first main game side is not displayed.
(7) Although there are a plurality of effect display formats (stay stages) in the limited frequency state B, there is only one effect display format (stay stage) in the limited frequency state A.
(8) The effect display format (stay stage) in the limited frequency state B and the effect display format (stay stage) in the limited frequency state A may be configured to have different types, and as a concept based on the configuration,
The pachinko gaming machine according to the concept (53) is:
A first variable period state in which the average value of the variable display period of the identification information is the first period, and a second variable period in which the average value of the variable display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period A period state, at least in a specific period in the specific game state after the execution of the special game is controlled to be in the first variable period state, and in the first variable period state, after the execution of the special game The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that it can be controlled to be in a second variable period state after the number of repetitions of one unit reaches a specified number of times from the start.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to this example, if the number of consecutive wins of the big hit in the situation of the probability changing gaming state reaches a predetermined number (probable change upper limit value), the non-probability change after the end of the predetermined number of big hits. It may be configured to be a gaming state and a time-saving gaming state, and as a concept based on the configuration,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (54)
The fact that the special game is executed when the high probability lottery state is set as one unit is set to be a low probability lottery state and a specific game state when the one unit is repeated a predetermined number of times. It is a pachinko game machine.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example, the timing (the number of symbol fluctuations after the end of the big hit) at which the limited frequency table referred to in the probability varying gaming state and the time shortening gaming state and the non-probability varying gaming state and the time shortening gaming state switches is changed. The limited frequency table to be referred to may be the same or different between the probability-variable game state and the time-reduced game state and the non-probability-variable game state and the time-reduced game state, and may be referred to only. The timing at which the limited frequency table switches is the same).
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (56)
A starting port that allows game balls to enter,
A variable member attached to the starting port, which can be displaced to an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, a game ball can easily enter the starting port compared to the closed or open state. When displaced to the closed state, a variable member that is configured so that the game ball cannot enter the starting port or is difficult to enter the ball compared to the open state,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
With
Random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on a ball entering the starting port,
A propriety judging means for executing a propriety judgment based on the random number,
Identification information display content determining means for determining the stop identification information of the identification information based on the result of the pass / fail determination,
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means, after variably displaying the identification information in the identification information display unit, the identification information display control means to control to stop display the stop identification information,
If the result of the winning determination is a winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the main game identification information display unit, a special game control means for executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening an advantageous state for the player. When,
With
The low probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode that belongs to the predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability Also has a high probability lottery state with a high probability,
As a game state related to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d), the normal game state and a variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) which are more variable than the normal game state. ) Has a specific game state that is likely to be open,
A first variable period state in which the average value of the variable display period of the identification information is the first period, and a second variable period in which the average value of the variable display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period At least a period state, and controls to be able to be a first variable period state in a specific period in a specific game state after the end of execution of the special game. After reaching the specific number of times that the number of repetitions of one unit is less than the predetermined number from the start, it is configured to be able to control to the second fluctuation period state,
A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the specific number of times is the same in a high probability lottery state and in a low probability lottery state.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example, there are cases where the probability-variable gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state end with the number of symbol changes after the end of the big hit, and cases where it does not end (substantially continues until the next big hit). It may be configured as such, as a concept based on the configuration,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (57)
It has at least a stop display mode A as a stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, and a stop display mode B which is a stop display mode different from the stop display mode A,
The specific game after the end of the special game executed when the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode A or when the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode A The specific number of times in the case of a state as the first specific number,
The specific game after the end of the special game executed by the first identification information being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode B or the second identification information being executed by being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode B When the specific number of times in the case of the state is a second specific number,
A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the first specified number is configured to be larger than the second specified number.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured such that when the probability-variable gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state continue until the next time, the variation pattern table after a specific number (the number of time savings when the next time is not continued) is changed. Well, as a concept based on this configuration,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (58)
It has at least a stop display mode A as a stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, and a stop display mode B which is a stop display mode different from the stop display mode A,
The specific game after the end of the special game executed when the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode A or when the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode A The specific number of times in the case of a state as the first specific number,
The specific game after the end of the special game executed by the first identification information being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode B or the second identification information being executed by being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode B When the specific number of times in the case of the state is a second specific number,
The first specific number is configured to be greater than the second specific number,
The specific game after the end of the special game executed when the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode A or when the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode A A table that is referred to when determining the variable display time of the identification information that is variably displayed from the end of the special game to the stop display of the identification information that is the second specified number of times, A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the table is configured to be different from a table that is referred to when determining the variable display time of the identification information that is variably displayed after the stop display of the identification information that is two specific times. .

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example is an effect that can be executed during a big hit, and an effect that notifies that there is a hold scheduled to be a big hit in the hold is in a non-probability fluctuating gaming state and a time shortening gaming state. It may be configured to be able to be executed during the winning big hit (can be executed even in the probability changing game state and the time shortened game state, or can be executed also in the non-probability changed game state and the time shortened game state), and based on the structure. Conceptually,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (59)
A main game section for controlling the progress of the game,
A starting port that allows game balls to enter,
A variable member attached to the starting port, which can be displaced to an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, a game ball can easily enter the starting port compared to the closed or open state. When displaced to the closed state, a variable member that is configured so that the game ball cannot enter the starting port or is difficult to enter the ball compared to the open state,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
An effect display unit capable of displaying effects,
A sub-game unit for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
Random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on a ball entering the starting port,
A propriety judging means for executing a propriety judgment based on the random number,
When a random number is obtained by the random number obtaining means, the obtained random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and a random number temporary storing means for controlling the occurrence of a hold,
When the variable display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, control is performed such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display unit and then the identification information is stopped and displayed according to the determination content based on the random number related to the certain hold. Identification information display control means,
If the result of the winning determination is a winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the main game identification information display unit, a special game control means for executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening an advantageous state for the player. With
The sub game department,
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game unit side,
On the basis of the game information received by the game information receiving means, comprising effect display content control means capable of controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
The low probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode that belongs to the predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability Also has a high probability lottery state with a high probability,
As a game state related to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d), the normal game state and a variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) which are more variable than the normal game state. ) Has a specific game state that is likely to be open,
It is configured to be able to execute a hold look-ahead effect, which is an effect that suggests the feasibility of a special game related to a certain hold,
A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that when a special game is executed in a low probability state and a specific game state, a reserved look-ahead effect can be executed during execution of the special game.

  Here, before describing each component, the features (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Pachinko gaming machines are mainly composed of gaming machine frames and gaming boards. Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

  First, the gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18, an upper bowl D20, a lower bowl D22, and a firing handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame for fixing a pachinko gaming machine at a position where the pachinko gaming machine is to be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame that matches the opening of the outer frame D12, and is attached to the outer frame D12 via a hinge mechanism (not shown) so as to be openable and closable. The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for firing game balls, a mechanism for detachably housing a game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting game balls, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is formed of glass or the like, and is supported by the door D18. The door D18 is attached to the front frame D14 via a hinge mechanism (not shown) so as to be openable and closable. The upper ball dish D20 has a mechanism for storing the game balls, sending the game balls to the firing rail, extracting the game balls to the lower ball dish D22, and the like. The lower ball dish D22 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. Further, a speaker D24 is provided between the upper ball dish D20 and the lower ball dish D22, and a sound effect according to a game state or the like is output.

  Next, the game board has a game area D30 defined by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34. In addition, in the game area D30, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10, an auxiliary game start port H10, a plurality of game nails and a mechanism such as a windmill (not shown) and various general winning ports are provided. First big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20, first main game symbol display device A20, second main game symbol display device B20, effect display device SG, auxiliary game symbol display device H20, center decoration D38 and out opening D36 is installed. Hereinafter, each element will be described in order.

  Next, the first main game start port A10 is set as a start winning port corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game start port A10 includes a first main game start port entrance detection device A11s. Here, the first main game start port entrance ball detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first main game start port A10, and the first main game start indicating the entry when the ball is entered. Generate incoming ball information.

  Next, the second main game start port B10 is set as a start winning port corresponding to the second main game. As a specific configuration, the second main game start port B10 includes a second main game start port entrance detection device B11s and a second main game start port electric accessory B11d. Here, the second main game starting port entrance ball detecting device B11s is a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball into the second main game starting port B10, and the second main game start indicating the entering ball when entering the ball. Generate incoming ball information. Next, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is changed to a closed state in which game balls are not easily won in the second main game starting port B10 and an open state in which game balls are easier to win than in the normal state.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are provided apart from each other, and a game flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area). The ball is configured to be easily guided to the first main game start port A10, but difficult to be guided to the second main game start port B10. On the other hand, game balls flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (with reference to the center of the game area) are configured to be hard to be guided to the first main game start port A10, but to be easily guided to the second main game start port B10. . Note that “easy to be guided” and “difficult to be guided” are determined, for example, by the number of entering balls when 10,000 game balls are fired on the right and left sides, respectively.

  In the present embodiment, the motorized accessory is provided on the second main game starting port B10 side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the motorized accessory is provided on the first main game starting port A10 side. You may. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are arranged apart from each other, but the present invention is not limited to this. The second main game start port B10 may be arranged so as to overlap with the second main game start port B10. In that case, the upper portion of the second main game start port B10 is closed by the presence of the first main game start port A10. May be.

  Next, the auxiliary game starting port H10 includes an auxiliary game starting port entering ball detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game starting port entrance ball detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the auxiliary game starting port H10, and generates auxiliary game starting port entry information indicating the entry when the ball is entered. I do. It should be noted that the entry of a game ball into the auxiliary game starting port H10 is a trigger for a lottery for expanding the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d of the second main game starting port B10.

  Here, in the present embodiment, game balls flowing down the right and left sides of the game area D30 (with reference to the center of the game area) can be guided to the auxiliary game start port H10. ｛However, the present invention is not limited to this. A game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the auxiliary game start port H10, while the left side of the game area D30 (the center of the game area is The game ball flowing down the criterion may be configured to be less likely to be guided to the auxiliary game start port H10.

  Next, a first special winning opening C10 and a second special winning opening C20 are provided above the out opening D36, and a game ball flowing down the right side or the left side of the gaming area D30 (based on the center of the gaming area). Is configured to easily pass through the area where the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20 are arranged before reaching the out opening D36.

  Next, the first special winning opening C10 is a horizontal rectangular out port which is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops the big hit symbol. It is a winning port corresponding to the main game, located above D36. As a specific configuration, the first special winning opening C10 includes a first special winning opening winning detection device C11s for detecting the entry of a game ball, a first special winning opening electric accessory C11d (and the first special winning opening). Mouth solenoid C13). Here, the first special winning opening winning detection device C11s is a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball into the first special winning opening C10, and the first special winning opening entry information indicating the entering when the ball enters. Generate The first special winning opening motorized accessory C11d changes the first special winning opening C10 into a normal state in which the game ball cannot be won or difficult to enter the first large winning opening C10 and an open state in which the game ball can easily be won (No. The first winning port solenoid C13 is excited and varied). Note that, in the present embodiment, the mode of the large winning opening is a mode in which the game ball is formed into a horizontal rectangular shape and is variable between a normal state in which the game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state in which the game ball is easily won. It is not limited to. In this case, for example, a mode in which a bar-shaped member provided in the special winning opening protrudes toward the player side and a retracted state where the bar-shaped member is retracted with respect to the player side (so-called, (Vero type attacker) or a mode (a so-called slide type attacker) in which an opening on a passage on which a game ball can roll is used as a large winning opening and the opening can be closed and opened. This is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the special winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the second large winning opening C20 forms a horizontal rectangular shape which is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) is stopped at the big hit symbol, and is out. A winning port corresponding to the main game, located above the mouth D36. As a specific configuration, the second special winning opening C20 includes a second special winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, a second special winning opening electric accessory C21d (and the second special winning opening). Mouth solenoid C23). Here, the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s is a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball into the second special winning opening C20, and the second special winning opening entering information indicating the entering when the ball enters. Generate The game ball that has entered the second special winning opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s. Next, the second big winning opening electric role-playing object C21d sets the second big winning opening C20 in a normal state where the game ball cannot be won or difficult to enter the second big winning opening C20 and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. Make it variable. Note that, in the present embodiment, the mode of the large winning opening is a mode in which the game ball is formed into a horizontal rectangular shape and is variable between a normal state in which the game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state in which the game ball is easily won. It is not limited to. In this case, for example, a mode in which a bar-shaped member provided in the special winning opening protrudes toward the player side and a retracted state where the bar-shaped member is retracted with respect to the player side (so-called, (Vero type attacker) or a mode (a so-called slide type attacker) in which an opening on a passage on which a game ball can roll is used as a large winning opening and the opening can be closed and opened. This is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the special winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is related to the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game). This is a device for executing the displayed information. As a specific configuration, the first main game symbol display device A20 (the second main game symbol display device B20) includes a first main game symbol display portion A21g (a second main game symbol display portion B21g) and a first main game symbol. And a symbol holding display section A21h (second main game symbol holding display section B21h). Here, the first main game symbol hold display section A21h (second main game symbol hold display section B21h) is composed of four lamps, and the number of the lamps turned on is the first main game (second main game). (The number of fluctuations of the main game symbols that have not been executed). Note that the first main game symbol display section A21g (the second main game symbol display section B21g) is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbols (the second main game symbols) are "0" to "9". Is displayed with ten kinds of numbers and "-" of a loss. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a 7-segment LED is used so that it is difficult for a player to recognize which main game symbol is displayed. It is preferable to use a symbol or the like to display the information. Also, the display of the number of holds is not limited to the configuration of four lamps, but is configured to be able to display the number of hold of up to four lamps (for example, it is configured of one lamp, Equation 1: lighting, holding number 2: low-speed blinking, holding number 3: medium-speed flashing, holding number 4: high-speed blinking).

  Since the first main game symbol (the second main game symbol) does not necessarily have to have a staging role, in the present embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (the second main game symbol display device B20). Is set to an inconspicuous degree. However, in a case where the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) itself has a staging role and does not display the first decorative symbol (second decorative symbol), an effect described later is used. The first main game symbol (second main game symbol) may be displayed on a liquid crystal display such as the display device SG.

  Next, the effect display device SG is a device that executes an effect image including a decorative symbol that fluctuates and stops in conjunction with the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol, and the like. Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 in which an effect is performed including a change display of a decorative symbol and the like. Here, the display area SG10 includes a first hold display section SG12 (and a second hold display section SG13) for displaying main game hold information and, for example, a moving image of a plurality of rows of decorative design variations imitating a slot machine game. And a decorative symbol display area SG11 for displaying Although the effect display device SG is constituted by a liquid crystal display in the present embodiment, it may be constituted by other display means such as a mechanical drum or an LED. Next, the first hold display section SG12 (and the second hold display section SG13) is composed of four lamps, and these lamps are linked to the hold lamps of the main game symbols.

  Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that executes display and the like related to the auxiliary game symbols. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g and an auxiliary game symbol hold display unit H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol hold display section H21h is configured with four lamps, and the number of lightings of the lamps corresponds to the number of auxiliary game symbol changes held (the number of auxiliary game symbol changes that have not been executed).

  Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the effect display device SG, and has functions such as a flow path of a game ball, protection and decoration of the effect display device SG. The game effect lamp D26 is provided in the game area D30 or in an area other than the game area D30, and plays a role of rendering by blinking or the like.

  Next, the basic structure of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko gaming machine controls the entire operation of the pachinko gaming machine, and particularly controls the entire game operation such as a lottery when the ball enters the first main game starting port A10 (second main game starting port B10) (that is, the game). Control board M that performs control directly related to the interests of the player, and effect control means (sub-main control) that performs display control and the like related to various effects on the effect display device SG that imparts interest to the game U. Unit) SM, a sub-sub-control unit SS for mainly performing the effect display, and a game ball supplied from the prize ball tank KT in accordance with a prize in the prize ball tank KT, the prize ball rail KR, and each winning port. A prize ball payout device (set base) KE including a payout unit KE10 for paying out to the plate D20, a prize ball payout control board KH for controlling a payout operation by the payout unit KE10, and a game ball (reserved ball) of the upper ball plate D20. The game area D30 A launching device D42 that launches one ball at a time, a launch control board D40 that controls the launching operation of the launching device D42, a power supply unit E that supplies power to each unit of the pachinko gaming machine, and power on / off of the pachinko gaming machine. A power switch Ea and the like, which are switches, are provided on the back surface of the front frame D14 (on the side opposite to the game side).

  Next, an electrical schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment pays out game balls based on information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M for controlling the progress of the game and the main control board M. Based on information (signals, commands, etc.) from the winning ball payout control board KH to be controlled and the main control board M, various effects on the effect display device SG such as fluctuation and stop of the decorative pattern, sound from the speaker D24, A sub-control board S (in this example, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are arranged on one board) for controlling the lighting of the game effect lamp D26, the execution of error notification, and the like; And a power supply unit E for supplying power to the entire gaming machine including the control board. Here, the sub-control board S is a sub-main control unit SM that controls various effects on the effect display device SG, such as the change and stop of the decorative pattern, sound from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, and error notification. And two control units of a sub-sub-control unit SS for executing display processing such as variable display / stop display, hold display and advance notice display of decorative symbols on the effect display device SG. The main control board M, the prize ball payout control board KH, the sub-main control unit SM, and the sub-sub control unit SS are provided with a CPU for performing various arithmetic processing, a ROM for storing in advance a program defining the arithmetic processing of the CPU, and a CPU. A RAM for temporarily storing data (various data generated during a game, a computer program read from a ROM, and the like) handled by the game is mounted. Hereinafter, a schematic configuration of each substrate and an electrical connection mode between each substrate and device will be outlined.

  First, the main control board M includes the winning opening sensor Ns ｛the first main game starting opening ball detection device A11s, the second main game starting opening ball detection device B11s, the auxiliary game starting opening ball detection device H11s, One big winning opening winning detection device C11s, a second big winning opening winning detecting device C21s, a general winning detecting device (not shown, a general winning opening is a winning opening that has a prize ball but does not perform a symbol lottery). ｝) The progress of the game, such as a drive solenoid (not shown) such as the above-described first winning opening electric accessory solenoid C13 and the second winning opening electric accessory solenoid C23, and an information display LED (not shown). The game device is electrically connected to an input / output device that is indispensable to the game device, and controls the progress of the game based on an input signal from each input device. Further, the main control board M is also electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub control board S (sub main control section SM / sub sub control section SS), and based on the progress of the game, the prize ball payout. Is transmitted to the prize ball payout control board KH, and information (command) relating to the progress state of the effect / game is transmitted to the sub-control board S. The main control board M can be connected to a hall computer HC or the like via an external connection terminal (not shown). Is configured to be able to output game-related information to an external device.

  In the present embodiment, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to be capable of two-way communication, as shown by the arrow in FIG. The control unit SM is configured to enable one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub main control unit SM (a communication method may be either serial communication or parallel communication). The communication between the control boards (between the control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication.

  Next, the prize ball payout control board KH includes a prize ball payout device KE that executes payout of game balls, and a device that is operable by a player and that receives a request for renting a game ball and outputs the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to the game ball lending device R for transmission. Although not shown, in the present embodiment, the control circuit section of the launching device is provided in the winning ball payout control board, and the winning ball payout control board and the launching device (launch handle, launching motor, ball feeder) are provided. Etc.). In this embodiment, the game ball rental device R is provided as a separate body and is adjacent to the game machine. However, the game ball rental device R may be integrated with the game machine. The control and management control of a recording medium for lending such as electronic money may be performed in an integrated manner.

  Next, the sub-control board S is connected to the effect display device SG for displaying a decorative pattern and the like, the speaker D24, the game effect lamp D26, and other effect driving devices (not shown) as described above. . In the present embodiment, as described above, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub-control unit SS are provided in the sub-control board S, and the control of the sound output from the speaker D24 by the sub-main control unit SM and the game effect ( Lighting control of the lamp D26 and determination control of display contents to be displayed on the effect display device are performed, and display control (substantial display control) on the effect display device is performed by the sub-sub-control unit SS. Is configured. In the present embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are configured to be integrated on the sub-control board S. However, the present invention is not limited to this. However, there is an advantage in that the structure is integrated such that space merits and a situation in which noise is mixed into wiring and the like can be reduced). Also, the work sharing between the two control units can be appropriately changed, for example, such that the sound control is executed by the sub-sub-control unit SS (preferably when a sound control circuit is integrated with the VDP). Further, an electronic value may be provided without providing a physical prize ball as the prize ball.

  Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. First, the main control board M includes game peripheral devices related to the game (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B, first and second main game shared peripheral devices C, auxiliary game peripheral devices H), A sub-main control unit SM (sub-game control means SM) relating to the effect is communicably connected to a prize ball payout control board KH which controls payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on a payout instruction from the main control board M. ing. The sub-main control unit SM (sub-game control means SM) is also electrically connected to the sub-sub control unit SS (effect display means SS) for executing image effects, various game effect lamps D26 (for example, side lamps), speakers D24, and the like. It is connected. Further, the prize ball payout control board KH is electrically connected to a prize ball payout device KE including a stepping motor, a sprocket, and the like. The main control board M, the sub main control section SM (sub game control section SM), the sub sub control section SS (effect display section SS), the prize ball payout control board KH, and the like store data and programs in hardware. ROM, RAM, and elements such as a CPU used for arithmetic processing. In addition, each unit that is hereinafter included in the main control board M may be configured to be mounted on a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device). For example, each unit to be included in a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device) may be configured to be mounted on the main control board M. Hereinafter, the details of each of the units (devices) will be described.

  The “random number” in the claims and the present specification is, for example, “0” to “65535” or “0” to “0” assigned according to the type of random number (for example, a winning random number or a variation mode determining random number). 255 "is a value randomly selected from a predetermined range such as" 255 ". Further, the random numbers need not be mathematically generated random numbers, but may be pseudo-random numbers generated by hardware random numbers, software random numbers, or the like. For example, the expression method of each value in a random number is a method in which values are sequentially expressed along a sequence of random numbers (plus one method), and the next value (initial value) when the final value of the sequence of random numbers is expressed ) Is determined by an accidental value (initial value updating method), a combination thereof, and the like.

  In addition, the limited frequency refers to the type and / or selectivity of the variation mode of the main game symbol after the specific symbol is stopped and displayed, and the variation frequency of the main game symbol before the specific symbol is stopped and displayed. This is a state (limited frequency state) different from the type and / or selectivity, and continues for a predetermined period. In addition, a table referred to when determining a variation mode related to the main game symbol in the limited frequency state is referred to as a limited frequency table, and the limited frequency table may have a plurality of types, and the gaming state and the special game end. The limited frequency table to be referred to is determined based on the number of changes in the later main game symbols and the like. Switching from a state referring to the limited frequency table A (also referred to as limited frequency state A) to a state referring to the limited frequency table B (also referred to as limited frequency state B) is referred to as a transition of the limited frequency state. ing. It should be noted that the limited frequency state is configured such that a plurality of limited frequency states can be provided even in one game state, and the limited frequency state may transition a plurality of times in one game state. When the variation mode of the main game symbol is determined with reference to the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table, the selectivity of the variation mode is made different by referring to the common limited frequency table (that is, the selection rate is different from the selection target). (Although the variation mode itself is the same, but the selectivity is different) (or the variation mode and the selectivity to be selected are the same, but a further fixed value is added to the variation time value according to the selected variation mode) May be adopted.

  Here, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has first and second main game symbol fluctuation management timers MP11t-C (decrement counters) that can be cleared to zero. Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment further includes an auxiliary game symbol change management timer MP11t-H capable of measuring time. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a second main game start port electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B for measuring a drive (open) time of the electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10. doing. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a winning ball counter MP33c for counting winning balls to the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20. The special game time management means MP34 further has a special game timer MP34t for managing a round time.

Here, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a probability change number counter MP51c capable of counting the number of times of probability variation, and a time reduction number counter MP52c capable of counting the number of time savings. Here, the “specific game” means, for example, a probability variation game in which a lottery probability to a special game is higher than that in the normal game, or a time shortening game in which the fluctuation time of the main game symbol is relatively shorter than that in the normal game. Point.

  Here, in the present embodiment, during the time reduction game, the fluctuation time of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is relatively reduced as compared with the non-time reduction game (time reduction). function). Further, the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol is relatively shortened, and the extension time of the electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10 is relatively extended (open time extension function). In addition, the time reduction game in the present embodiment ends when the total value of the number of times of change of the first main game symbol and the number of times of change of the second main game symbol exceeds a predetermined number of times. That is, the number of time savings is configured to be subtracted every time the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol change (stop). Note that the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment may have, for example, a function of performing a lottery transition from a specific game (for example, a probability variation game or a time reduction game) to a normal game with a predetermined probability every time a symbol changes. Good (a so-called pachinko game machine with a drop lottery function).

  Next, the gaming peripheral device will be described. Since the detailed configuration of some of the peripheral devices has already been described, the remaining configuration will be briefly described. First, the game peripheral devices include a first main game peripheral device A that is a first main game side peripheral device, a second main game peripheral device B that is a second main game side peripheral device, and a first main game side device. And first and second main game shared peripheral devices C, which are shared peripheral devices on the second main game side, auxiliary game peripheral devices H related to auxiliary games, sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM, sub sub control unit SS (and effect display device SG). Here, the effect controlled by the sub-main control unit SM includes the variation of the decoration symbol in a form synchronized with the variation of the first main game symbol and the variation of the second main game symbol in the game result. It relates to the display of only information that does not affect. Hereinafter, these peripheral devices will be described in order.

  First, the first main game peripheral device A includes a first main game start port A10 serving as an opportunity for a transition to a special game, and a first main game symbol display device A20 capable of displaying stop and change of the first main game symbol. ,have.

  Next, the second main game peripheral device B includes a second main game start port B10 serving as an opportunity for a transition to a special game, and a second main game symbol display device B20 capable of stopping and changing the second main game symbol. And

  Next, the first and second main game shared peripheral devices C are in a closed state during a normal game, and are opened under a predetermined condition during a special game (big hit). And the second winning port C20.

  Next, the auxiliary game peripheral device H includes an auxiliary game start port H10 that triggers opening of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10, and a stop display and a fluctuation display of the auxiliary game symbol. And an auxiliary game symbol display device H20.

  Here, the design variation time management timer SM21t is configured to measure the variation time of the decorative symbol.

  Next, the stay stage management counter SM23c is configured to count how many times the main game symbol has changed in the specific game state from the end of the special game in order to switch the effect stage. In addition, the extended house number counter SM23c2 is configured to count the number of consecutive winnings during a specific game.

  The effect display means (sub-sub-control unit) SS is electrically connected to an effect display device SG for displaying an image relating to the effect based on information from the effect display means (sub-sub-control unit) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying an image.

  Here, the display area SG10 has a decorative symbol display area SG11 for variably displaying decorative symbols, and a first hold display section SG12 (and a second hold display section SG13) for displaying main game hold information. ing.

  Note that the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so as to be able to transmit information, and the remaining effect display means (sub-sub control unit) ) SS is connected to sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM so that information can be transmitted. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, and the effect display means (sub-sub-control unit) SS controls the sub-game control. Means (sub-main control unit) is controlled by the SM. Note that another peripheral device may be controlled via another peripheral device controlled by the one-way communication (one-way communication) with the main control board M.

  Next, FIG. 6 is a main flowchart showing a flow of a general process performed by the main control board M. After the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the processing of FIG. That is, after turning on the power of the gaming machine and performing initialization (not shown), in step 1002, the CPUMC of the main control board M checks the input port of the RAM clear button, and resets the reset button ( RAM clear button), that is, whether or not an operation of intentionally clearing the contents of the RAM has been performed by the administrator of the game arcade or the like. If Yes in step 1002, in step 1004, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears all RAM contents (for example, information in the game state temporary storage means MB) on the main control board M side. Next, in step 1006, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits ram clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub-main control unit SM side (transmitted at this timing. Alternatively, a command may be set at the timing and transmitted in a control command transmission process described later), and the process proceeds to step 1016. On the other hand, if No in step 1002, in step 1008, the CPUMC of the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M (for example, the checksum recorded at the time of power failure and the storage in the RAM area). Comparison with the amount of information provided.) Next, in step 1010, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the contents of the RAM are normal (whether or not the information at the time of power interruption is not backed up in the RAM accurately) based on the check result. I do. If Yes in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process proceeds to step 1004 (the above-described RAM clearing process). On the other hand, if No in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is normal, in step 1012, the CPUMC of the main control board M Are transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM in step 1014 (the commands may be transmitted at the timing, or the commands may be set at the timing and described later). It may be configured to transmit in the control command transmission process), and the process proceeds to step 1016. Next, in step 1016, the CPUMC of the main control board M triggers an execution periodic interrupt (for example, a hardware interrupt about every 1.5 ms) related to the main processing of the main control board M shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt cycle is assumed to be T). (As a result, when the execution timed interrupt timing is reached, FIG. 11B is executed.) Transition. After step 1018, the CPUMC of the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number update processing (for example, increment processing of a random number counter) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

  Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described. The CPU MC of the main control board M executes the processing of FIG. 3B based on an interrupt request generated when the regular interrupt timing is reached. That is, when the scheduled interruption period T arrives (for example, a hardware interruption every 1.5 ms), in step 1100, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process described later. . Next, in step 1200, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a later-described electric accessory drive determination process. Next, in step 1300, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a main game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1400, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a main game symbol display process described later. Next, in step 1600, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a special game operation condition determination process described later. Next, in step 1700, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a special game control process described later. Next, in step 1997, the CPUMC of the main control board M (especially the prize ball payout determining means MH) performs the prize ball payout control processing (drive control of the prize ball payout device KE, etc.) based on the winning port where the game ball has won. The prize ball payout control board KH is executed, and a process for managing the result is executed. Next, in step 1998, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes output processing of an external signal (output of information to an external terminal board, a hall computer H, etc.). Next, in step 1999, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a control command transmission process (transmits the command set in each process described above to the sub-main control unit SM side), and immediately before the execution of this interrupt process The process returns to the process that was being executed.

  Next, the NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the CPUMC of the main control board M is configured so that the power interruption signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and when the power of the gaming machine is turned off, the processing shown in FIG. Is executed. That is, when the power of the gaming machine is turned off (in this example, at the time of an NMI interrupt), in step 1020, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets power-off information (for example, a checksum) based on the information in the RAM area. . Next, in step 1022, the CPUMC of the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to a power-off wait loop processing.

  Next, FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, in step 1102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a game ball has entered (flowed in, or passed in the case of a gate) the auxiliary game starting port H10. If Yes in step 1102, in step 1104, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the number of reserved balls is not the upper limit (for example, four). In the case of Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1108, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the reserved ball in a form of temporarily storing the random number in the RAM area of the main control board M together with information on the number of the reserved one, The process moves to the next process (the process of step 1200). It should be noted that also in the case of No in Steps 1102 and 1104, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in Step 1200).

  Next, FIG. 8 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the electric accessory opening flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the auxiliary game symbol changing flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a reserved ball relating to the auxiliary game symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the game state of the auxiliary game side (the flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag) and the acquired game state of the auxiliary game side. The stop symbol is determined based on the auxiliary game symbol random number based on the reserved ball (for example, when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, the winning symbol is selected with a higher probability than when it is off) and the main control board is determined. M is temporarily stored in the RAM area.

  Here, the right side of the figure is an example of an auxiliary game stop symbol determination lottery table. As shown in the table, in this example, the stop symbols include "D0, D1" and the stop symbol that becomes a hit symbol is "D1", and each symbol is released due to the stop. In the non-time shortening game, when the stopped symbol is “D1”, the open mode of the electric accessory is (open for 0.2 seconds → closed). Also, in the time reduction game, when the stopped symbol is “D1”, the opening mode is (opening for 0.2 seconds → closing for 0.2 seconds → opening for 0.2 seconds → closing for 3.0 seconds → 4. (Open for 0 seconds → closed). Note that the stop symbol is likely to be a lost symbol "D0" during a non-time-saving game, and the stop symbol is likely to be a hit symbol "D1" during a time-reduction game.

  Next, in step 1218, the CPUMC of the main control board M sends the auxiliary game symbol change time to the auxiliary game symbol change management timer MP11t-C based on the auxiliary game side game state (the flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag). (For example, 1 second when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, and 10 seconds when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is off). Then, in step 1220, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1222, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the hold information temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, and the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the auxiliary game symbol change management timer. After starting MP11t-H, the variation display of the auxiliary game symbol is started on the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g.

  Next, in step 1224, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time relating to the fluctuation time of the auxiliary game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol and displays the acquired stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol on the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g. I do. Then, in step 1228, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1230, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is a "hit" (D1, D2 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1232, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens based on the winning symbol on the auxiliary game side (for example, in the case of the winning symbol "D1", it opens for 1 second → closes for 1 second. → Open for 1 second → Close for 1 second → Open for 1 second → Closed, open pattern for hit symbol “D2”: Open for 0.2 seconds, Close for 0.8 seconds, Open for 5 seconds) Then, a predetermined time relating to the opening time (opening / closing time) of the electric accessory is set. Next, in step 1234, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the electric accessory opening flag. Then, in step 1236, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second main game electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10. Next, in step 1238, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game time reduction flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1238, in steps 1240 and 1242, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second main game electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10 and sets the electric accessory open flag. Turn off, and proceed to the next process (process of step 1300).

  If the answer is No in Step 1202, the process goes to Step 1238. If the answer is No in Step 1204, the process goes to Step 1224. If the answer is No in Steps 1206, 1224, 1230, and 1238, the following process is performed. Then, the processing shifts to (processing of step 1300).

  In this flowchart, for convenience, the process immediately proceeds to the next step after the stop symbol is displayed in step 1226, but is not limited thereto. In this case, the process may be shifted to the next process after a fixed stop display time of about 500 ms. Achievable).

  Next, FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, in step 1302, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first main game start port entrance ball entry information has been received from the first main game start port entrance ball detection device A11s of the first main game start port A10. judge. If Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls related to the main game (particularly, the first main game side) is not the upper limit (for example, four). If Yes in step 1304, in step 1306, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the first main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the first main game content determination random number, a winning / rejecting random number for determining whether or not to win, a symbol random number for determining a winning symbol, and a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol are determined. The three random numbers of the fluctuation random number random numbers for obtaining the random numbers are obtained. Incidentally, these three random numbers are generated by random number generating means having different update periods and random number ranges, respectively, and are acquired in series at this timing. Next, in step 1308, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the obtained random number in the RAM area of the main control board M. Next, in step 1310, the CPUMC of the main control board M sends the information (holding occurrence command) indicating that the first main game random number has been acquired to the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM. Set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission processing in step 1999).

  Next, in step 1312, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the second main game start port entrance ball entry information has been received from the second main game start port entrance detection device B11s of the second main game start port B10. Is determined. If Yes in step 1312, in step 1314, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls related to the main game (particularly, the second main game side) is not the upper limit (for example, four). If Yes in step 1314, in step 1316, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the second main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the second main game content determining random number, three random numbers of a winning / rejecting random number, a symbol random number, and a variation mode random number are acquired as in the first main game content determining means. Incidentally, the acquisition range of each random number of the first main game side and the acquisition range of each random number of the second main game side (for example, the acquisition range of the random number random number for the first main game and the random number random number for the second main game) Are set to the same. Next, in step 1318, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the obtained random number in the RAM area. Next, in step 1320, the CPUMC of the main control board M sends the information (holding generation command) indicating that the second main game random number has been acquired to the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM. It is set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1400). Note that if No in Steps 1302 and 1304, the process proceeds to Step 1312, and if No in Step 1312 and Step 1314, the process proceeds to the next process (Process of Step 1400).

  In the present embodiment, information indicating that a random number has been acquired is transmitted as information to be transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM in steps 1310 and 1320. However, the information of the random number value and the main game symbol The information may be transmitted together with the number of reservations, and the information may be used as information indicating that a random number has been acquired.

  Next, FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. First, in step 1401, the CPUMC of the main control board M checks whether or not there is no second main game symbol pending. In the case of Yes in step 1401, in step 1400 (1), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a first main game symbol display process described later, and executes the following process {steps 1400 (1) and (2) Move to｝. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1401, in step 1400 (2), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a second main game symbol display process described later, and executes the following process {step 1400 (1), (2) Processing shifts to (2).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when there is a reserved ball of the second main game symbol, regardless of the existence of the reserved ball of the first main game symbol (even if the winning order is the reservation of the first main game symbol) Is configured to be executed with priority given to holding the second main game symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to execute a parallel lottery in which the lottery is randomly performed.)

  Next, FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. In addition, since this process is substantially the same process on the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the process on the second main game symbol side will be described. Use parentheses. First, in step 1403, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Here, the change start condition is a condition that the special game is not being performed (or the condition device is operating), the main game symbol is not being changed, and the main game symbol is on hold. Although not shown in the present example, when a fixed variation time (time for stopping and displaying the fixed display symbol after the main game symbol is confirmed) is provided, the variation start condition of the next variation is provided during the fixed variation time. May not be satisfied.

  In the case of Yes in step 1403, in steps 1405 and 1406, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily determines the first main game content determination random number ( The second main game content determining random number is read out, the first main game content determining random number (second main game content determining random number) is deleted, and the remaining information temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M is read. Shift (pending digestion process). Next, in step 1408, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a main game symbol winning / decreasing lottery based on the first main game content determining random number (second main game content determining random number) (especially, a winning random number).

  Here, FIG. 12 (main game table 1) is an example of a first main game success / failure lottery table (second main game success / failure lottery table). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probability varying gaming state is configured to be higher than the jackpot winning probability in the non-probability varying gaming state. Note that the winning probability is merely an example, and is not limited to this. Further, in the present embodiment, the small hit is not provided, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and a small hit may be provided on the first main game side and / or the second main game side.

  Next, in step 1410, the CPUMC of the main control board M performs the main game based on the main game symbol success / failure lottery result and the first main game content decision random number (second main game content decision random number) (particularly, the symbol lottery random number). Stop symbols relating to the symbols are determined, and these are temporarily stored in the RAM area.

  Here, FIG. 12 (main game table 2) is an example of a first main game symbol determination lottery table (second main game symbol determination lottery table). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won, one main game is selected from a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, “5A · 7A” and “5B · 7B”). It is configured such that the symbol is determined as a big hit symbol. The number of rounds of the special game determined with reference to the main game symbol is 8R for 5A and 5B and 16R for 7A and 7B. In addition, the type of the random number value and the stop symbol is also an example, and is not limited to this. For example, the loss symbol is not limited to one type of symbol, and a plurality of types of symbols are provided. May be.

  Next, in step 1412, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the main game symbol win / fail lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (in particular, the variation mode lottery random number). The changing modes of the game symbols are determined, these are temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, and the process proceeds to step 1418.

  Here, FIG. 12 (main game table 3) is an example of a first main game fluctuation mode determination lottery table (second main game fluctuation mode determination lottery table). As shown in the present example, in the present embodiment, the variation mode (variation time) of the main game symbol is determined based on the winning / non-selection result of the main game symbol. That is, when the result of the lottery of the main game symbol is a hit, a variation mode in which the variation time is relatively long is easily determined. Note that this example is merely an example, and there is no limitation on the type of stop symbol, the selectivity, and the like. In the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the main game table 3 is not configured to have a different table according to the number of reserved balls, but is configured to have a different table according to the number of reserved balls. Needless to say, it is good. Further, the symbol change time on the first main game side in the time reduction game state (when the main game time reduction flag is on) may be configured to be relatively long. {Symbol on the second main game side} When the execution of the change is configured to be advantageous to the player, the symbol change efficiency of the first main game side is reduced, so that the second main game side is likely to be held (advantageous for the player). This is particularly effective when the starting port of the first main game and the starting port of the second main game cannot be separated.

  Next, in step 1418, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes commands (stop symbol information, attribute information of the stop symbol, fluctuation mode information, etc.) relating to the main game symbol temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, and A command (symbol variation display start instruction command) related to the current game state is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side (the sub-main control unit SM side is executed by the control command transmission process in step 1999). To be sent to). Next, in step 1420, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined time relating to the fluctuation time of the main game symbol in the first and second main game symbol fluctuation management timers MP11t-C. Next, in step 1422, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the first main game symbol display unit A21g (the second main game symbol display unit) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (the second main game symbol display device B20). On B21g), the variation display of the main game symbol is started in accordance with the variation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M. Next, in step 1424, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the fluctuating flag, and proceeds to step 1428.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1403, in step 1426, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the changing flag is on. If Yes in step 1426, the process proceeds to step 1428, and if No in step 1426, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 1600).

  Next, in step 1428, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time relating to the fluctuation time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1428, in step 1430, the CPUMC of the main control board M sends a command for transmitting the information (symbol confirmation display instruction command) to the effect that the symbol variation is ended to the sub-main control unit SM side. It is set in the buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission processing in step 1999). Next, in step 1432, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the first main game symbol display unit A21g (the second main game symbol display unit) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (the second main game symbol display device B20). B21g), the variation display of the main game symbol is stopped, and the stop symbol temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M is displayed and controlled as the fixed stop symbol. Next, in Step 1434, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the in-flight flag.

  Next, in step 1436, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a big hit symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1436, in step 1438, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the condition device operation flag, and proceeds to step 1550. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1436, the process proceeds to step 1550.

  Next, in step 1550, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a specific game end determination process described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1428, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. First, in step 1552, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the count value of the probability change counter MP51c is greater than zero. If Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPUMC of the main control board M decrements the counter value of the probability change counter MP51c by one (decrement). In the case of Yes in step 1554, in step 1556, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the probability change counter MP51c and determines whether or not the counter value is 0. If Yes in step 1556, in step 1558, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability change flag, and proceeds to step 1570. It should be noted that also in the case of No in Step 1552 or Step 1556, the process proceeds to Step 1570.

  Next, in step 1570, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the time-saving counter MP52c is greater than zero. In the case of Yes in step 1570, in step 1572, the CPUMC of the main control board M decrements the counter value of the time-saving counter MP52c by one (decrement). Next, in step 1574, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the time reduction counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value is 0. If Yes in step 1574, in step 1576, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game time reduction flag. Next, in step 1578, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game time reduction flag, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1570 or step 1574, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the special game operation condition determination process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, in step 1602, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1602, in step 1604, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the specific game flags (main game probability change flag / main game time reduction flag / auxiliary game time reduction flag). Next, in step 1606, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the value of the time reduction counter MP52c. Next, in step 1608, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the value of the probability change counter MP51c. Next, in step 1612, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the special game transfer permission flag. Next, in step 1614, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the condition device operation flag, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1700). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1602, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1700).

  Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. First, in step 1702, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game transfer permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1702, in steps 1704 and 1706, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the special game shift permission flag and turns on the special game execution flag. Next, in step 1707, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets an initial value (1 in this example) to a round number counter (not shown). Next, in step 1708, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets information for starting a special game (special game start display instruction command) in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit side. (Sent to the sub-main control unit SM in the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the flow proceeds to step 1712.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1702, in step 1710, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. Then, if “Yes” in the step 1710, the process shifts to a step 1712. If the determination in step 1710 is No, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the permission for the special game has not been granted, and proceeds to the next process (the process in step 1997).

  Next, in step 1712, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the round continuation flag is off, in other words, whether or not it is immediately before the start of each round. If Yes in step 1712, that is, immediately before the start of each round, first, in step 1714, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets an open pattern (for example, an open pattern that keeps opening, a pattern that opens and closes). I do. Next, in step 1716, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in step 1718, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the round continuation flag. Next, in step 1720, the CPUMC of the main control board M drives the first big winning opening electric accessory C11d of the first big winning opening C10 (or the second electric winning portion C21d of the second big winning opening C20). To open the first winning port C10 (or the second winning port C20), set a special game timer MP34t (especially an open time timer) for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), and start. I do. On the other hand, if No in step 1712, that is, if the special winning opening is being opened, the flow shifts to step 1722 without performing the processing of steps 1714 to 1720.

  Next, in step 1722, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a game state command (for example, the current number of rounds, the number of winning game balls, etc.) relating to the current special game to the sub main control unit SM. In the command transmission buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM in the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1724, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and stores a predetermined number (for example, 10) in the first winning port C10 (or the second winning port C20) in the round. It is determined whether there is a winning ball of (ball). In the case of Yes at step 1724, the process moves to step 1728. On the other hand, in the case of No at Step 1724, at Step 1726, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the special game timer MP34t (especially the opening time timer) to determine a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) related to opening the special winning opening. Is determined. Also in the case of Yes in step 1726, the process moves to step 1728. If the determination in Step 1726 is No, the process moves to the next process (the process in Step 1997).

  Next, in step 1728, the CPUMC of the main control board M makes the first big winning opening electric winning thing C11d of the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening electric good C21d of the second big winning opening C20). Is stopped to close the first winning port C10 (or the second winning port C20). Next, in step 1730, the CPUMC of the main control board M resets the special game timer MP34t (in particular, the open time timer). Next, in step 1732, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the round continuation flag. Next, in step 1733, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown). Next, in step 1734, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the last round has been completed (for example, whether or not the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) has exceeded the maximum number of rounds). . If Yes in step 1734, in step 1736, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the special game execution flag. Next, in step 1738, the CPUMC of the main control board M sends the information (special game end display instruction command) to end the special game to the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit SM side. Set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM in the control command transmission process of step 1999). Then, in step 1750, CPUMC of main control board M executes a game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1997). It should be noted that also in the case of No at step 1734, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing at step 1997).

  Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game, according to the subroutine of step 1750 in FIG. First, in step 1770, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change flag. Next, in step 1771, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times (80 times in this example) in the probability change counter MP51c. Next, in step 1772, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current stopped symbol is a time-saving A big hit symbol (a big-hit symbol with the least number of time savings, in this example, 2A / 2B). I do. In the case of Yes in step 1772, in step 1773, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value A (60 times in this example) to the time saving counter MP52c, and proceeds to step 1779. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1772, in step 1775, the CPUMC of the main control board M has a current stop symbol of a time saving A big hit symbol (a hit symbol whose number of time savings is medium, 3A in this example). It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1775, in step 1776, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value B (80 times in this example) to the time saving counter MP52c, and proceeds to step 1779. On the other hand, if No in step 1775, in other words, if the current stop symbol is the time saving C big hit symbol (the big hit symbol with the largest number of time savings, in this example, 5A, 7A, 5B, 7B), step 1778 is performed. Then, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the predetermined value C (100 times in this example) in the time reduction counter MP52c, and proceeds to step 1779.

  Next, in step 1779, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time reduction flag. Next, in step 1780, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game time reduction flag. Next, in step 1781, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current stop symbol is a time saving B big hit symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1781, in step 1782, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game which has been won in the probability varying game state and the non-time shortening game state has ended. In the case of Yes in step 1782, in step 1783, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a special stage command (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission processing in step 1999), and performs the next processing (step (Process of 1997). In this manner, when the first main game side wins the jackpot relating to the time-saving B jackpot symbol in the probability varying gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state, the staying stage is set to the “space stage” (other jackpot symbols are used). If such a jackpot is won, the stay stage is changed to the “night stage”. It should be noted that also in the case of No in Step 1781 or Step 1782, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in Step 1997). Here, the stay stage is a stage that depends on controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display device SG, and the tendency of the effect to be displayed when the stay stage is different (the type of the notice effect that can be executed, The types of background effects that can be performed, the frequency of execution of a notice effect that can be executed, the frequency of execution of a background effect that can be executed, and the like are different. As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of time savings after the end of the big hit can be different depending on the big hit symbol, that is, there are a plurality of types of time savings that can be given. In addition, the configuration related to the number of times saved is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment. For example, it is configured to have a plurality of times saved when the non-probability changing game state and the time reduction game state are set after the end of the big hit. You may. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of probable changes and the number of time savings given after the end of the big hit are configured to be different, and when the number of time savings is smaller than the number of probable changes, the number of probable changes and the number of time savings are the same. There is a case and a case where the number of time savings is larger than the number of times of probability change (the number of times of probability change and the number of times of time saving indicate the maximum number of times that can be continued if no big hit is won). Note that the average value of the number of time savings given after the end of the big hit is “60 × 200/1024 + 80 × 500/1024 + 100 × 324/1024 = 82.42” after the end of the big hit on the first main game side. After the big hit on the second main game side is “60 × 200/1024 + 100 × 824/1024 = 92.19”, and the big hit on the first main game side is after the big hit on the second main game side. It is configured so that the number of time savings to be given is relatively greater than after the end. The present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be made such that the number of time savings given after the end of the big hit on the first main game side is larger than that after the big hit on the second main game side. In the case of such a configuration, it is preferable that the second main game side is more likely to transition to the probability variation game state after the big hit end than the first main game side after the big hit end. is there. In addition, as a configuration having a plurality of types of time savings that can be given after the end of the special game, depending on whether the special game was won in the time-saving game state or the special game in the non-time-saving game state (as described above, It does not matter whether the special game was won while the time extension function was activated or the special game was won while the open time extension function was not activated.) You may be comprised so that it may be possible. In such a configuration, when a special game is won in the time-reduced game state, the number of time savings after the end of the special game may be larger than the number of times of probable change (the special game is the first game). It may be only the case of the special game on the main game side, or the special game may be only the case of the special game on the second main game side). Further, when a special game is won in the non-time shortening game state, the number of times of saving after the end of the special game may be configured not to be larger than the number of times of the probability change (the special game is a special game of the first main game side). The game may be performed only in the case of the game, or the special game may be performed only in the case of the special game of the second main game side).

Moreover, you may comprise as follows.
(1) Regardless of whether or not the gaming state that has won the special game is the time-saving gaming state, if the special game is a special game on the second main game side, the number of times reduced is 100.
(2) In the case of winning the special game of the first main game side in the time shortened game state, the number of times saved becomes 100 times, and in the case of winning the special game of the first main game side in the non-time shortened game state. The number of time savings is 60, 80, or 100 based on the big hit symbol related to the special game.
(3) When the special game is won in the time-saving game state, the number of times of reduction of time becomes 100 regardless of the big hit symbol.
(4) The average value of the number of times reduced in the case where the first main game side is won in the special game in the time reduction game state is the average of the number of times reduced in the case where the second main game side is selected in the time reduced game state. Greater than the average. In the case of such a configuration, the second main game side is preferentially digested, and “the expected value of the number of prize balls obtained by the first main game side by the big hit <the expected value of the number of prize balls obtained by the second main game side by the big hit” In this case, it is possible to compensate for a disadvantage in a case where the first main game side has won a big hit in the time reduction game state. In a gaming machine (a so-called ball game machine) in which a gaming ball enters a specific area in the special winning opening during a big hit and enters a probability fluctuating game state after the end of the big hit, a “first main game side” When the ratio of the long open jackpot <the ratio of the long open jackpot on the second main game side ”, the short open jackpot is won, and during the short open jackpot, the game ball enters the specific area. In the case where there is no short time hit, the first main game side may be configured to make the short opening big hit relatively larger than the second main game side short opening big hit. In addition, when the first main game side wins the long open jackpot, and the game ball does not enter the specific area during the long open jackpot, the number of times reduced in time is the short open jackpot on the second main game side. May be configured to be more than the number of times in a case where no game ball enters the specific area during the short open big hit. In addition, when the second main game side wins the long open jackpot and the game ball does not enter the specific area during the long open jackpot, the number of times reduced in time is the short open jackpot of the first main game side. May be configured to be more than the number of times in a case where no game ball enters the specific area during the short open big hit. In addition, the long open big hit is a big win prize mouth in a distribution game execution round during the big hit (when a game ball enters a specific area during the round, the game shifts to a probability fluctuation game state after the big hit end). A big hit that makes it easier to enter a specific area by opening for a relatively long time, and a short opening big hit is a distribution game execution round during a big hit (a game ball enters a specific area during execution of the round). This causes a transition to the probability-variation gaming state after the end of the big hit).

  Next, a control process executed on the sub main control unit SM side will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 17 is a main flowchart of the sub-control board S side (particularly, the sub-main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the process in FIG. 7A is a process on the sub main control unit SM side that is executed after resetting when the power to the gaming machine is turned on or the like. That is, at the time of turning on the power to the gaming machine, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub main control unit SM executes an initial process based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, RAM clear). When information is received → Initialize the RAM on the sub side, and when various information commands are received → Information related to the effect at the time of power interruption is reset in the RAM on the sub side. Thereafter, the processing shifts to a loop processing for repeatedly executing (b) which is a repetition processing routine of the sub-main control unit SM. Here, when (b) is executed, as shown in the process of FIG. 11B, first, in step 2100, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a hold information management process described later. Next, in step 2300, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a decorative symbol display content determination process described later. Next, in step 2400, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a decorative symbol display control process described later. Next, in step 2500, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes a special game-related display control process described later. Next, in step 2600, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a stay stage determination process described later. Next, in step 2999, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes display command transmission control processing (transmits the commands set in these series of subroutines to the sub-sub-control unit SS side), and terminates this repetition processing routine. I do.

  As described above, the sub-main control unit SM employs a mode in which the sub-main side routine (S2100 to S2900) is loop-processed after reset. The process of FIG. 3C is an interrupt process of the sub main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line on the main control board M is transmitted to one terminal of the CPU of the sub main control unit SM (in this example, , NMI terminal). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the sub main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sends a command input port from the main control board M side (described above). Check the data signal line input port). In step 2006, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S temporarily stores the command transmitted from the main control board M in the RAM area of the sub-main control unit SM based on the confirmation result, The process returns to the process that was being executed.

  Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the hold information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a new hold generation command (hold information on the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol) has been received from the main control board M side. I do. In the case of Yes in step 2102, in step 2104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the drawing hold counter (in this example, up to four for the first main game and up to four for the second main game) to " "1" is added (incremented). Next, in step 2106, the CPUSC of the sub control board S, based on the hold generation command transmitted from the main control board M side, holds information (particularly a random value related to the main game symbol lottery, The random number, the symbol random number, and the variation random number are temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S, and the process proceeds to step 2116.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2102, in step 2108, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a symbol variation display start instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2108, in step 2110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S decrements (decrements) “1” from the circuit diagram holding counter. Next, in step 2112, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S shifts the hold information related to the symbol change and the remaining hold information. Next, in step 2114, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the symbol content determination permission flag, and proceeds to step 2116. If No in step 2108, the process proceeds to step 2116 without executing the processes in steps 2110 to 2114. Next, in step 2116, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays on the effect display device SG (especially, the first hold display unit SG12 and the second hold display unit SG13) the same number of hold display lamps as the number of the circuit diagram hold counter. Is displayed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2200).

  Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. First, in step 2302, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2302, in step 2304, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the symbol content determination permission flag. Next, in step 2306, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the decorative symbol is a stop symbol. In the case of a lost symbol, the variation pattern such as “1.3.5” and the variation mode are determined and temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S. Next, in step 2308, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the symbol content determination flag, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2400). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2302, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2400).

  Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. First, in step 2402, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the symbol content determination flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the symbol content determination flag. Next, in step 2406, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the symbol change flag. Next, in step 2408, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S starts the wiring variation time management timer SM21t, and proceeds to step 2410. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2402, the process proceeds to step 2410.

  Next, in step 2410, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol changing flag is on. If Yes in step 2410, in step 2412, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S checks the timer value of the wiring variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2414, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the decoration symbol change start timing has been reached. If Yes in step 2414, in step 2416, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a decoration display variation display command (transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS in the display command transmission control processing in step 2900). , To step 2426.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2414, in step 2418, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) of the decorative symbol has been reached. If Yes in step 2418, in step 2420, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a decoration display stop display command (temporary stop display command) (in the display command transmission control process in step 2900, the sub-sub control unit SS side). , And then proceeds to step 2426.

  On the other hand, if No in step 2418, in step 2422, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the display timing of the preview image or the reach image has been reached based on the variation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S. Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2422, in step 2424, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets an image display command related to the notice image or the reach image (in the display command transmission control process in step 2900, the sub-control unit SS side). Is transmitted), and the flow shifts to step 2426. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2422, the processing shifts to step 2426.

  Next, in step 2426, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the main game symbol has been stopped and displayed. In the case of Yes in step 2426, in step 2436, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a stop display command (fixed display command) of the decorative symbol (transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS in the display command transmission control process in step 2900). Be done). Next, in step 2438, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S stops and resets (clears to zero) the wiring variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2440, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the symbol changing flag, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2500). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2410 or step 2426, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2500).

  Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart of a special game-related display control process according to a subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. First, in step 2502, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the special game flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a special game start display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2504, in steps 2506 and 2508, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the special game flag and displays the big hit start display on the effect display device SG. The process is performed (display is performed appropriately based on the type of big hit), and the process proceeds to step 2512. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2502, the processing shifts to step 2512.

  Next, in step 2512, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of winnings on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main side (playability and big hits). It may be appropriately executed as needed based on the type or the like). Next, in step 2520, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2520, in step 2522, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs the big hit end display on the effect display device SG (displays appropriately based on the type of big hit). Next, in step 2524, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the special game in progress flag, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2600). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2504 or step 2520, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2600).

  Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination process according to the subroutine of step 2600 in FIG. First, in step 2602, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the stay stage switching timing {for example, the timing when the special game is completed (wins), the timing when the gaming state is shifted, (even in the same gaming state). It is determined whether or not the timing at which the variation mode determination table has been switched, and whether the number of variations has reached a predetermined number of times (even in the same game state) or the like. If Yes in step 2602, in step 2606, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the current gaming state is the probability varying gaming state and the time shortening gaming state. If Yes in step 2606, in step 2607, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether a special stage command (the command set in step 1783) has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2607, in step 2608, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the type of the stay stage ｛the effect content, and the effect (background effect, notice effect, etc.) that can be executed when the stay stage is different is different. The “space stage” is set as｝, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2900). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the special stage command is received from the main side, that is, when the time-saving B big hit symbol is won in the probability varying game state and the non-time shortening game state, the “space stage” stays. It is configured to be set as a stage.

  On the other hand, if No in step 2607, in step 2610, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets “night stage” as the stay stage, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2900).

  On the other hand, if No in step 2606, in step 2612, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the current gaming state is the non-probability varying gaming state and the time shortening gaming state. If Yes in step 2612, in step 2614, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the “evening stage” as the stay stage, and proceeds to the next process (the process in step 2900). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2612, in step 2616, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the current gaming state is the probability varying gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state. If Yes in step 2616, in step 2618, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the “empty stage” as the stay stage, and proceeds to the next process (the process in step 2900). On the other hand, if No in step 2616, that is, if the current gaming state is the non-probability varying gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state (the gaming state is also referred to as the normal gaming state), in step 2620, the sub control board S CPU sets the “daytime stage” as the staying stage, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2900). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2602, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2900). As described above, in the present embodiment, the staying stages are configured to be different depending on the gaming state, and there are a plurality of staying stages that can be set in the probability varying gaming state and the time shortening gaming state. Also, when the first main game side wins the time saving B big hit symbol (3A in this example) in the probability varying game state and the non-time shortening game state, the stay after the special game related to the time saving B big hit symbol is completed. The stage is a “space stage” (the gaming state is a probability-variable gaming state and a time-reduced gaming state), while in other cases (particularly, the time reduction on the first main gaming side in the probability-variable gaming state and the time-reducing gaming state) In the case of winning the B jackpot symbol), the stay stage after the end of the special game is the “night stage” (the gaming state is the probability varying gaming state and the time shortening gaming state), that is, the special regarding the same jackpot symbol Even after the end of the game, the stay stage after the end of the special game may be different depending on the game state at the time of the special game winning. In addition, the stay stage in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state can be set to the “space stage” and the “night stage”, while the stay stage in the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state is the “evening stage”. It is configured that the stay stage is different due to the different game state. Further, the stay stage in the probability varying game state and the non-time shortening game state is only the “empty stage”, and there are fewer types of stay stages in the probability varying game state and the time shortening game state. Further, the stay stage may be configured to be able to transit one or more times in the same game state. For example, the stay stage in the probability-variation game state may be “night stage A” → “night stage B” → “night stage C ". Note that, as described above, the transition trigger may be the arrival of the predetermined number of changes, the switching timing of the change mode determination table, or the like. Specifically, when the pattern change is executed 20 times in “Night Stage A”, the stay stage transitions from “Night Stage A” to “Night Stage B”, and the symbol change in “Night Stage B”. When the execution is performed 40 times, the stay stage transits from “night stage B” to “night stage C”. Note that the change mode determination tables referred to in each stay stage may be the same or different. Further, the stay stage may be configured to transition even in the “evening stage” or the “sky stage”. In such a case, it is preferable that the number of transitions is smaller than that in the “night stage”.

  With the configuration described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state can be ended by the number of symbol changes after the end of the special game, and the special game If the symbol change has passed without winning the special game after the end, the probability change game state and the time reduction game state will end at the same time, and the probability change game state will be earlier than the time reduction game state By having a case where the game ends and a case where the time-reduced game state ends before the probability-variable game state, a transition to various game states occurs according to the elapse of the number of changes after the end of the special game. Gaming machine with a high price. Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, various stay stages can be set depending on the gaming state, so that it is possible to provide an effect mode in which the player is not bored.

(Modification 1 from the present embodiment)
Note that, in the present embodiment, the configuration related to the stay stage in the gaming machine in which the number of times of change in probability and the number of times of saving are different is illustrated, but the configuration related to the stay stage is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment. Therefore, a configuration of a stay stage different from the present embodiment is referred to as a first modification from the present embodiment, and only the points different from the present embodiment will be described below in detail.

  First, FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination process according to the subroutine of step 2600 in FIG. 17 in the first modification example from the present embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2622 (variation 1). That is, if it is determined in step 2602 that the stay stage switching timing has been reached, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is determined in step 2622 (variation 1). Determines whether or not the current gaming state is a time shortening gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2622 (variation 1), the process proceeds to step 2607, and in the case of No, the process proceeds to step 2616. With such a configuration, in the first modification example from the present embodiment, the stay stage in the probability-variable game state and the time-reduced game state is the same as the stay stage in the non-probability-variable game state and the time-reduced game state. ing. In the first modification example from the present embodiment, when the special stage command is received, the stay stage is configured to be different from the case where the command is not received. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The stay stage of the variable gaming state and the time shortened gaming state and the non-probability varying gaming state and the time reduced gaming state may always be the same. Further, in the first modification example from the present embodiment, regardless of the big hit symbol, a case where the game has shifted to the probability changing game state and the time shortening game state after the big hit has ended, and a case where the game has shifted to the non-probability changing game state and the time shortening game state. Although the stay stage was the same in the above, the present invention is not limited to this, and only when the number of time savings given after the end of the big hit is larger than the number of times of a probability change, the state has shifted to the probability fluctuation game state and the time shortening game state after the end of the big hit. The staying stage may be configured to be the same in the case and in the case of shifting to the non-probability changing game state and the time reduction game state.

  With the above-described configuration, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the present embodiment, the probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state end simultaneously at the same time as in the present embodiment, In a configuration in which the variable game state ends before the time reduction game state and the time reduction game state ends before the probability fluctuation game state, various stay stages are set depending on the game state. And the probability staying game state and the time shortening game state and the non-probability changing game state and the time shortening game state can be the same stay stage, so that the player can see the current Can be configured so that it is difficult to determine whether the game is in an advantageous state or a disadvantaged state, and the game can be advanced while always having a sense of expectation.

(2nd Embodiment)
Note that, in the present embodiment, the configuration related to the stay stage in the gaming machine in which the number of times of change in probability and the number of times of saving are different is illustrated, but the configuration related to the stay stage is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment. Therefore, a configuration of a stay stage different from the present embodiment is referred to as a second embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described below in detail.

  First, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of steps 1400 (1) and (2) in FIG. 10 in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 1411-1 (second) to step 1411-1 (second) and step 3200 (second), that is, the stop symbol related to the main game symbol is determined in step 1410. Thereafter, in step 1411-1 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN52c is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1411-1 (second), in step 1411-2 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current gaming state is the non-time shortened gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 1411-2 (second), a fluctuation time related to the main game symbol is determined with reference to the main game table 3 in step 1412. Even in the case of Yes in step 1411-2 (second), the limited frequency table 5 is referred to only for the five symbol changes, and the main game table 3 is referred to after the five symbol changes. You may comprise. On the other hand, in the case of No at Step 1411-2 (second), at Step 1413-1 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a random number on the main game side, a winning / rejecting lottery result, and a stop symbol related to the main game symbol. Based on the limited frequency table 4, a variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to step 1418.

  If No in step 1411-1 (second), in step 3200 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a limited frequency variation mode determination process described later. Next, in step 1411-4 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M decrements the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN52c by 1, and proceeds to step 1418. As described above, in the second embodiment, when the main game table 3 is not referred to when determining the variation mode of the main game symbol, that is, in the case of the limited frequency state, (1) the limited frequency counter value is 0. There are two cases: a case where the value is larger than the value, and (2) a case where the limited frequency counter value is 0 and the game is in the time shortening game state.

  Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the limited frequency fluctuation mode determination processing according to the subroutine of step 3200 (second) in FIG. 24 in the second embodiment. First, in step 3202, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the counter value G of the limited frequency counter MN52c is within the first stage range (the first stage of the limited frequency counter value in the limited frequency state having four stages). It is determined whether it is within the range and 80 ≧ G> 75). In the case of Yes in step 3202, in step 3204, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency table 1 based on the random number on the main game side and the result of the lottery lottery to change the fluctuation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol. Is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process {the process of step 1411-4 (second)}.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3202, in step 3206, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the counter value G of the limited frequency counter MN52c is within the second step range (the second step in the limited frequency state having four steps). It is determined whether or not the value is within the range of the limited frequency counter value, and 75 ≧ G> 1). In the case of Yes in step 3206, in step 3208, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency table 2 based on the random number of the main game side and the result of the lottery determination, and the variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol. Is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process {the process of step 1411-4 (second)}. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3206, in other words, the counter value G of the limited frequency counter MN52c is within the third range (the range of the third limited frequency counter value in the limited frequency state having four levels). If G = 1), in step 3210, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency table 3 based on the random number of the main game side and the result of the lottery determination, and the variation mode regarding the main game symbol. (Fluctuating time) is determined, and the routine goes to the next processing {the processing of step 1411-4 (second)}. As described above, in the second embodiment, the state shifts to the limited frequency state after the end of the big hit, and the limited frequency state can be shifted to a plurality of stages (three or four stages).

  Next, FIG. 26 is an example of the limited frequency tables 1 to 4. First, the limited frequency table 1 will be described in detail. In the second embodiment, when the limited frequency counter value G is a value within a predetermined range (80 ≧ G> 75), the limited frequency table 1 is referred to. The tables referred to by the first main game side and the second main game side have the same contents. The fluctuation time at the time of hitting is relatively longer than the fluctuation time at the time of loss. It should be noted that, compared with the limited frequency table 2, the limited frequency table 3, and the limited frequency table 4, the limited frequency table 1 is configured to have the shortest average fluctuation time. Further, the limited frequency table 1 is configured to refer to the same table regardless of the number of reserved balls.

  Next, the limited frequency table 2 will be described in detail. In the second embodiment, when the limited frequency counter value G is within a predetermined range (75 ≧ G> 1), the limited frequency table 2 is referred to. . The tables referred to by the first main game side and the second main game side have the same contents. The fluctuation time at the time of hitting is relatively longer than the fluctuation time at the time of loss. The limited frequency table 2 is configured to have the longest average fluctuation time when compared with the limited frequency table 1, the limited frequency table 3, and the limited frequency table 4. Further, the limited frequency table 2 is configured such that the average fluctuation time is shorter when two or three reserved balls are present than when there are zero or one reserved balls.

  Next, the limited frequency table 3 will be described in detail. In the second embodiment, the limited frequency table 3 is referred to when the limited frequency counter value G is within a predetermined range (G = 1). The tables referred to by the first main game side and the second main game side have the same contents. Further, there is only one type of variation time that can be selected in the limited frequency table 3, and the variation time is constant irrespective of the number of pending balls as a result of the success / failure lottery.

  Next, the limited frequency table 4 will be described in detail. In the second embodiment, only when the limited frequency counter value G is within a predetermined range (G = 0) and the gaming state is the time shortening gaming state. The frequency table 4 is referred to. The fluctuation time at the time of hitting is relatively longer than the fluctuation time at the time of loss. The tables referred to by the first main game side and the second main game side have the same contents. The limited frequency table 4 is configured to refer to the same table regardless of the number of reserved balls.

  Note that the contents of the limited frequency table are not limited to this, and the contents of the limited frequency table referred to by the first main game side and the second main game side only in a predetermined stage (for example, the first stage). You may comprise so that it may become the same. Further, in a predetermined stage (for example, the third stage), the variation mode may be determined irrespective of the number of holdings (on both the first main game side and the second main game side). Otherwise, the first main game side selects the variation mode from the same table regardless of the number of holds, and the second main game side selects the number of holds if the number of holds is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. Is desirably configured so as to have a relatively shorter variation time than when the number is less than or equal to a predetermined number.

  In the second embodiment, there are three or four types of limited frequency tables, in the order of “limited frequency table 1 → limited frequency table 2 → limited frequency table 3”, or “limited frequency table 1 → limited frequency table”. The configuration is such that switching is performed in three or four steps in the order of “2 → restricted frequency table 3 → restricted frequency table 4” (so-called three-stage ST, four-stage ST), but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the order of the tables to be referred to is changed, there is no problem even if the type of the limited frequency table is only three. Furthermore, there are two tables, a limited frequency table 1 and a limited frequency table 2, and the tables to be referred to are switched in the order of the limited frequency table 1 → the limited frequency table 2 → the limited frequency table 1 to form a three-stage ST. Is also good.

Further, in a configuration in which the limited frequency table (limited frequency state) referred to in the probability varying gaming state (or the time shortened gaming state) transitions, the limited frequency state A and the limited frequency table 2 referencing the limited frequency table 1 are changed. When the limited frequency state B is referred to,
(1) In the limited frequency state B, when the number of holds is the first number of holds (for example, 0), the average value of the variation time of the symbol change that causes a loss and the number of holds is the second number of hold (for example, 3). In this case, a difference between the average value of the fluctuation times of the symbol fluctuations, which is a loss, occurs in a predetermined period.
(2) In the limited frequency state A, when the number of holds is the first number of holds (for example, 0), the average value of the fluctuation time of the symbol change that causes loss, and the number of holds is the second number of hold (for example, 3) In this case, there is no difference between the average value of the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation which is a loss and the average value in the predetermined period.
(3) The second hold number (for example, three) in the limited frequency state B is the most selected than the variation time that is the most likely to be lost in the second hold number (for example, three) in the limited frequency state A The fluctuating time, which is more likely to cause loss, is longer.
(4) The limited frequency state B stays for a longer period (the number of changes) than the limited frequency state A.
(5) Specific effects that can be displayed in the limited frequency state B are not displayed in the limited frequency state A.
(6) When the game is in the time-saving game state, the prefetch effect relating to the first main game side is not displayed.
(7) There are a plurality of effect display formats (stay stages) in the limited frequency state B, but there is only one effect display format (stay stage) in the limited frequency state A.
(8) The effect display format (stay stage) in the limited frequency state B and the effect display format (stay stage) in the limited frequency state A are different.
It may be configured as follows. Further, a plurality of these configurations may be combined or only one may be applied. Note that each limited frequency state only needs to stay during a period during which one or more symbol changes are executed (at least stay during a period during which one symbol change is executed).

  Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. 24 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 1560 (second), that is, after turning off the main game probable change flag in step 1558, in step 1560 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M The counter value of the continuous counter MP51c-2 is cleared to zero, and the routine goes to Step 1570. Here, in the second embodiment, when the winning in the probability fluctuation gaming state is a predetermined number of consecutive wins, after the end of the predetermined number of big hits, the non-probability fluctuation gaming state, so-called limiter machine It is configured to be. Therefore, at the timing when the probability varying game state ends, the counter value of the positive variation continuous counter MP51c-2 for measuring the number of consecutive winnings in the probability varying game state is cleared to zero.

  Next, FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game, according to the subroutine of step 1750 (second) in FIG. 15 in the second embodiment. First, in the second embodiment, the big hit symbol is only "5A / 5B / 7A / 7B". First, in step 1784-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the counter value of the probability-changing continuous counter MP51c-2. Next, in step 1784-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the counter value of the probability-variation continuous counter MP51c-2 is the specified value (when the counter value reaches the predetermined value, the probability-variation gaming state is ended. In the example, it is determined whether or not 4) is satisfied. In the case of Yes at step 1784-3, at step 1784-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the probability-changing continuous counter MP51c-2 to zero. Next, in step 1784-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the predetermined number A (80 times in this example) to the time saving counter MP52c, and proceeds to step 1784-13.

  In the case of No at Step 1784-3, at Step 1784-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probable change flag. As described above, in the second embodiment, a big win is won, so that the game is shifted to the probability variation game state after the big hit end unless the probability-change continuous counter value reaches the specified value (the normal game state). All of them will be in the probability-variation gaming state even after the end of the big hit won in). Next, in step 1784-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the currently stopped big hit symbol (the big hit symbol related to the finished big hit) is the number-of-times-limited positively changing big hit symbol (the probability changing game state after the big hit end). However, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit symbol in which the number of time savings to be provided is 80 times, and in this example, it is 5A / 5B). In the case of Yes in step 1784-7, in step 1784-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the big hit that has been won in the non-time shortening game state has ended. In the case of Yes in step 1784-8, in step 1784-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a certain number of times in the probability change counter MP51c (a counter value such that the counter value does not become 0 until a big hit is substantially won). In this example, 65536 times is set. In the second embodiment, a counter value such that the counter value does not become 0 until the big hit is substantially won is set in the probability change counter MP51c. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the game mode is shifted to the probability varying game state later, the probability varying game state may be configured to continue until the next big hit is won (the counter value may not be used). Next, in step 1784-10, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the predetermined number A (80 times in this example) to the time saving counter MP52c, and proceeds to step 1784-13. On the other hand, in the case of No at Step 1784-7 or Step 1784-8, at Step 1784-11, the CPUMC of the main control board M stores the predetermined number of times in the probability change counter MP51c (the counter value remains 0 until the big hit is substantially won). In this example, the counter value is set to 65536 times (an infinite number of times may be set). Next, in step 1784-12, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the time saving number counter MP52c to a predetermined number of times B (a counter value such that the counter value does not become 0 until a big hit is won. , 65536 times (an infinite number of times may be set), and the flow shifts to step 1784-13.

  Next, in step 1784-13, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (80 times in this example) to the limited frequency counter MN52c (in a situation where the counter value remains, the big hit is won). In this case, it is cleared to zero). Next, in step 1784-14, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game time reduction flag. Next, in step 1784-15, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time reduction flag, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1997). As described above, in the second embodiment, the predetermined number B (a counter value such that the counter value does not become 0 until the big hit is won, that is, the counter value is 65536 times) is set as the probability change counter value. The probability fluctuation gaming state continues until the next big hit, and the limited frequency counter value becomes 0, so that the limited frequency state is reached (see the limited frequency table 4). Further, in the second embodiment, when the probability change game state and the time reduction game state are shifted to after the big hit end, the probability change game state and the time reduction game state substantially continue until the next big hit (65536 times). ) And a case where the game ends with a predetermined number of symbol fluctuations (80 times), and when the game shifts to the non-probability fluctuation game state and the time reduction game state after the end of the big hit, the non-probability fluctuation game state and the time reduction This is only the case where the game state ends with a predetermined number of symbol changes (80 times). In addition, in the case where the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening game state are set after the end of the big hit, the probability that the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening game state substantially continue until the next big hit is determined after the end of the big hit on the first main game side. (For example, 40% of the big hit of the first main gaming side is substantially the probability changing game state and the time shortening game state are continued until the next big hit is larger than the big hit of the first main game side). 60% of the jackpot on the second main game side is a jackpot in which the probability-variable gaming state and the time-reducing gaming state continue until the next jackpot), or in the time-reducing gaming state. The jackpot that has been won in the non-time-shortened game state is a jackpot in which the probability-variable game state and the time-shortened game state continue until the next big hit substantially after the end of the jackpot (for example, , 70% of the big hit won in the time-saving game state is a big-hit in which the probability-changing game state and the time-saving game state continue until the next big-hit, and 30% of the big hit won in the non-time-saving game state Is a big hit in which the probability varying game state and the time shortening game state continue until the next big hit). In addition, when the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state substantially continue until the next big hit, the probability change game state and the predetermined number of times (80 times in this example) of the symbol change after the big hit is completed. The fluctuation mode is determined by referring to the limited frequency tables 1 to 3 until the symbol change of the predetermined number of times when the time shortening game state ends is completed, and after the end, the fluctuation is performed by referring to the limited frequency table 4. The mode is determined, that is, the symbol change of the predetermined number of times (80 times in this example) after the big hit is completed, the symbol change of the predetermined number of times when the game state and the time shortening game state are ended. The limited frequency tables referred to before and after the end are different from each other. In addition, when the limited frequency table 4 is referred to, the jackpot expectation degree when the reach fluctuation occurs (in this example, the symbol fluctuation is a fluctuation time of 30 seconds or more in comparison with the case of referring to other tables). Since the reach fluctuation is executed, the big hit expectation when the fluctuation time is 30 seconds or more is relatively high (the fluctuation mode determination table in which the fluctuation time of 30 seconds or more is not selected) is compared. Not). In the same manner, the frequency of occurrence of the loss of prefetching effect may be relatively low when the limited frequency table 4 is referred to.

  Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the hold information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. 17 in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2116 (second) to step 2122 (second), step 2650 (second), step 2700 (second), and step 2750 (second), that is, step 2106. In step 2118 (second), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the new hold is a hold of the first main game side in step 2118 (second). In the case of Yes in step 2118 (second), in step 2650 (second), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a first main game winning prefetching process described later, and proceeds to step 2120 (second). I do. On the other hand, if No in step 2118 (second), in step 2700 (second), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a second main game winning prefetching process described later, and proceeds to step 2120 (second). Move to

  Next, in step 2120 (second), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the new hold is a trigger hold. In the case of Yes in step 2120 (second), in step 2750 (second), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a prefetch pending content determination process described later, and proceeds to step 2122 (second). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2120 (second), the processing shifts to step 2122 (second). Next, in step 2122 (second), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the hold display mode of the hold other than trigger hold to be “white”, and proceeds to step 2116 (second). Next, in step 2116 (second), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S lights the same number of suspension display lamps as the installation suspension counter value in the determined suspension display mode, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). Transition.

  Next, FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the first main game prize winning prefetch determination process according to the subroutine of step 2650 (second) of FIG. 29 in the second embodiment. This process will be described separately for the process related to the prohibition condition of the prefetch lottery and the process related to the prefetch lottery. In the prohibition process of the prefetch lottery, first, in step 2652, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the second main game hold (hold which is given priority over the first main game side) in the hold. It is determined whether it does not exist. If Yes in step 2652, in step 2654, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the current game state is not the time reduction game state. In the case of Yes in step 2654, in step 2658, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not there is a hold having information indicating that the trigger is held in the hold. Here, the trigger hold is a hold that has been won in the pre-fetch lottery at the time of winning (the pre-fetch lottery at the time of the first main game winning, the pre-fetch lottery at the time of the second main game winning). In the case of Yes in step 2658, in step 2660, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not there is a big hit hold before the new hold. In the case of Yes in step 2160, in step 2161, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S can use the new hold in the same game state as the current game state (the game state shifts until the new hold is used). Is not scheduled). If Yes in step 2661, the process moves to step 2662. As described above, the prefetching effect on the first main game side is executed in the non-time reduction game state, and is not executed in the time reduction game state. In addition, the prefetch effect on the second main game side, which will be described later, is executed in the time reduction game state, and is not executed in the non-time reduction game state. With such a configuration, when comparing the prefetching effect of the first main game side with the prefetching effect of the second main game side, the prefetching effect of the first main game side is in the non-time shortening game state. The pre-reading effect on the second main game side is to be compared with the case of the time reduction game state. Also, in the second embodiment, if the game state changes at the timing when the new hold is completed, the prefetch effect is not executed (the prefetch effect does not cross the game state). In other words, the new hold is not executed. It is configured so that the trigger is not held. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of types of pre-reading effects may be provided to provide a pre-reading effect that can be executed across game states and a pre-reading effect that does not cross game states. Specifically, it has a hold change look-ahead effect (a look-ahead effect in which the hold display mode changes) as a look-ahead look-ahead effect that can be executed across game states, and a background change look-ahead effect as a look-ahead effect that does not straddle the game state. It may be configured to have an effect (a prefetching effect in which the background effect changes) (there is a background changing prefetching effect as a prefetching effect that can be executed across the game state, and does not cross the game state It may be configured to have a pending change look-ahead effect as a look-ahead effect). Also, as the game state when performing the prefetching effect across the game state, the transition from the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state to the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state, the game state Although it is possible to execute a look-ahead effect, it is possible to straddle other game states (for example, from a probability-variation game state and a time-reduction game state to a non-probability-variation game state and a non-time-reduction game state, or a probability-variation game state and a time reduction). It is configured such that it is not possible to execute a look-ahead effect from a gaming state to a probability varying gaming state and a non-time shortening gaming state, and from a non-probability varying gaming state and a time reducing gaming state to a non-probability varying gaming state and a non-time reducing gaming state. May be.

  Next, in the latter process related to the prefetch lottery, first, in step 2662, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the new hold is a hold that results in a big hit. In the case of Yes in step 2662, in step 2664, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a prize-winning prefetch lottery in which the new hold is won with a predetermined probability (で は in this example) at a predetermined probability. Move to On the other hand, if No in step 2662, in step 2668, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S places the new hold on a long change (a hold with a change time of 60 seconds or more is set as a long change hold). Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2668, in step 2670, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a prize-winning lottery to win with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/10), and proceeds to step 2674. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2668, the processing shifts to step 2684. In step 2668, it may be configured to determine whether the new hold is a hold corresponding to a reach effect or a hold corresponding to a fluctuation pattern that becomes an SP reach effect.

  Next, in step 2674, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the winning prefetch lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2684, in step 2676, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S temporarily stores the new hold selected in the prize-winning prefetch lottery with information indicating “trigger hold”, The processing shifts to processing {step 2120 (second) processing}.

  On the other hand, if No in step 2652 (if the second main game side has a hold in the hold), in step 2678, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is temporarily stored in the RAM of the sub control board S. Delete the information indicating “trigger hold” from the information related to the hold (if the hold having the information indicating trigger hold does not exist in the hold, do not execute this processing and proceed to the next processing To the next process {the process of step 2120 (second)}. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2654, step 2658, step 2660, step 2661, or step 2674, the processing shifts to the next processing {the processing of step 2120 (second)}. It should be noted that the processing of step 2678 is performed in the case where the second main game-side hold exists (occurs) in a second main game-side priority digestion gaming machine as in the second embodiment. This is a configuration for avoiding a situation where the pre-reading effect over a plurality of fluctuations is not executed normally because the reservations of the main game side are consumed first, so that the fluctuation order does not become the planned fluctuation order. In this example, when the first main game side executes the look-ahead effect, the second main game side does not have a hold and is in a non-time shortening game state (open time extension function is not activated). And in the non-time shortened game state (during the opening time extension function operation), the game is configured to mainly proceed on the first main game side. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of trigger suspensions can occur, or a configuration in which the suspension change can be executed simultaneously for two or more suspensions. Further, the present invention is not limited to executing the hold change only at the timing at which the trigger hold occurs, and is configured to execute the hold change in a period from when the trigger hold occurs until the trigger hold is consumed. (For example, at the start of the next variation in which the trigger hold has occurred, during the variation of the next variation in which the trigger hold has occurred, in the stop of the variation in the next variation in which the trigger hold has occurred, at the start of the next variation in which the trigger hold has occurred, or in the trigger hold. In the middle of successive fluctuations in which has occurred, in the case of successive fluctuation stops in which trigger suspension has occurred, in the timing after the time of successive fluctuation stops in which trigger suspension has occurred, etc.).

  Next, FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the second main game prize winning prefetch determination process according to the subroutine of step 2700 (second) of FIG. 29 in the second embodiment. This process will be described separately for the process related to the prohibition condition of the prefetch lottery and the process related to the prefetch lottery. In the former prohibition process of the prefetch lottery, first, in step 2702, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the current gaming state is the time shortening gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2702, in step 2704, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not there is a hold having information that the trigger is held in the hold. In the case of Yes in step 2704, in step 2706, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not there is a big hit hold before the new hold. In the case of Yes in step 2706, in step 2707, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S can use the new holding in the same game state as the current game state (the game state shifts until the new holding is used). Is not scheduled). If Yes in step 2707, the process moves to step 2708.

  Next, in the latter processing related to the prefetch lottery, first, in step 2708, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the new hold is a hold that causes a big hit. If Yes in step 2708, in step 2710, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a prize winning prefetch lottery in which a new holding is won with a predetermined probability (１ ／ in this example) at a predetermined probability. Transition. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2708, in step 2712, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S holds the new hold as a long change (a hold with a change time of 60 seconds or more is set as a long change hold). Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2712, in step 2716, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a prize winning lottery lottery in which the new hold is won with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/5), and step 2720 Move to On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2712, the process moves to step 2720. In step 2712, it may be configured to determine whether the new hold is a hold corresponding to a reach effect or a hold corresponding to a fluctuation pattern that becomes an SP reach effect.

  Next, in step 2720, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the winning prefetch lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2720, in step 2722, the CPUSC of the sub control board S temporarily stores the new hold selected in the winning prefetch lottery with information indicating “trigger hold”, The processing shifts to processing {step 2120 (second) processing}. Note that also in the case of No in step 2702, step 2704, step 2706, step 2707, or step 2220, the processing shifts to the next processing {the processing of step 2120 (second)}. As described above, in the second embodiment, in the time shortened game state, the second main game side is configured to be able to win the prefetch lottery, while the first main game side is not configured to win the prefetch lottery. In the time shortened game state, the first main game side is configured to be able to win the prefetch lottery, while the second main game side is not configured to win the prefetch lottery. The present invention is not limited to this, and in a state where the opening time of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is relatively extended (a state in which the opening time extension function is activated), the second main game is started. A state in which the first main game side does not win the prefetching lottery while the first main game side does not win the prefetching lottery, and the opening time of the second main game starter electric accessory B11d is not relatively extended (opening time extension function). (In a state where is not operated), the first main game side may win the prefetch lottery, while the second main game side may not win the prefetch lottery. Also, in the description according to the present example, in the case where a configuration in which the operation is different between the time reduction game state and the non-time reduction game state is illustrated, the state in which the opening time extension function is activated and the opening time extension function are activated. There is no problem even if it is replaced with a configuration that operates differently when it is not performed. In this example, as described above, when executing the look-ahead effect on the first main game side, there is no hold on the second main game side and the non-time shortened game state (open time extension function (Operation), and in the non-time shortened game state (open time extension function not activated), the game is configured to proceed mainly on the first main game side. Further, when executing the look-ahead effect on the second main game side, it is a condition that the time reduction game state (opening time extension function is in operation) and the time reduction game state (opening time extension function) (During operation), the game is configured to proceed mainly on the second main game side. With such a configuration, when comparing the look-ahead effect in the time reduction game state (opening time extension function is operating) with the look-ahead effect in the non-time reduction game state (open time extension function is operating), The pre-reading effect (or a matter related to pre-reading such as pre-fetching lottery) on the second main game side in the shortened game state (during operation of the open time extension function) and the first main game in the non-time shortened game state (open time extension function is activated) The prefetching effect (or a prefetching related item such as a lottery) may be compared.

  Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the prefetch pending content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2750 (second) in FIG. 29 in the second embodiment. First, in step 2752, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the trigger hold is a hold that results in a big hit. If Yes in step 2752, in step 2754, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the display mode of the b trigger hold by referring to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of the big hit), and performs the following processing {step 2122 ( 2) Go to (2). On the other hand, if No in step 2752, in step 2758, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the trigger hold display mode with reference to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of loss), and performs the following processing {step 2122} (2) Move to (2).

  Here, the two tables at the bottom of the figure are a hold display mode determination table (at the time of a big hit) and a hold display mode determination table (at the time of loss). In the second embodiment, the type of display mode that can be selected when the display mode of the trigger hold that can be changed during execution of the hold change effect is determined with reference to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of the big hit) is “rainbow color”. , "Red", "green", and "blue", and the types of display modes that can be selected when determining with reference to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of loss) are "red", "red", and "red". There are three colors, "green" and "blue", and the lottery is determined by a random number dedicated to determining the hold display mode. When referring to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of the big hit), "red" is most easily selected, while when referring to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of loss), "blue" is most easily selected. The jackpot expectation rate (the ratio of the rate of occurrence of the jackpot fluctuation to the total occurrence rate of the jackpot fluctuation and the loss fluctuation) for each hold display mode when the hold change effect occurs is “rainbow”. "Color" is selected only at the time of the big hit, and colors other than "rainbow" are in the order of "red", "green", and "blue" from the one with the highest expectation of the big hit. It should be noted that the display mode that can be changed is merely an example, and there is no problem even if the type that can be changed or the color that can be changed is changed, for example, when the open extension function is not activated than when the open extension function is activated. The number of types of the hold display mode may be larger in the non-probability changing game state and in the non-time shortening game state than in the probability changing game state and the time shortening game state. Further, this configuration is merely an example, and there is no problem even if the selection ratio of the hold display mode is changed. For example, in the hold display mode determination table (at the time of the big hit), “red: blue” = “300: 324” In the hold display mode determination table (at the time of loss), “blue” is easier to select than “red” regardless of the success / failure result, such as “red: blue” = “100: 624”. The difference between the selectivity of the suspended display mode and the difference of the selectivity of the suspended display mode at the time of the loss may be configured such that the difference at the time of the loss is larger. Further, in this example, the display color of the hold is configured to indicate the degree of expectation that the symbol change related to the trigger hold is a big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the case of a big hit (or It may be configured to be able to indicate the game state after the execution of the special game (in conjunction with the degree of expectation to be a big hit). In the case of such a configuration, in particular, during the probability fluctuation game state, the display color of the hold indicates the degree of expectation to shift to the probability fluctuation game state after the execution of the special game in the case of a big hit in the hold. (For example, if the reserved display color is “red”, the probability of change is high, if the color is “blue,” the probability of change is low, etc.) It is possible to execute an effective production that incites whether to end.

  Further, in this example, the hold display mode is configured to be displayed in a display color other than “white” at the timing when the trigger hold occurs. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold change effect is notified in advance. An effect may be executed and the hold display mode may be changed (for example, the character causes an action on the effect display device SG and the trigger hold display mode changes from “white” to “blue”). . The execution timing of the hold change effect may be configured to be executed at various timings such as a symbol change start timing, a symbol change end timing, and a timing during symbol change.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, at the time of executing the hold change effect (in this example, at the time of occurrence of the trigger hold), the jackpot expectation degree is determined by the display mode selected from the plurality of types of hold display modes. It is configured to be different. In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of hold change effects can be executed for a certain hold during execution of the look-ahead effect (from the timing of winning the look-ahead lottery to the end of the change of the main game symbol related to the trigger hold). . With this configuration, for example, when the hold change effect is executed twice during the execution of the look-ahead effect, if the display mode of the hold changed in the first hold change effect is “blue”, The display mode of the hold changed in the second hold change effect is set to “green” or “red”, that is, each time the hold change effect is executed, the display mode changes to the hold display mode with high expectation of big hit. It is desirable to be configured to (rank up) (so as not to impair the player's expectation). Also, the effect related to the change of the hold display is not limited to this, and as a result, an effect mode that does not accompany the change of the hold display may be provided. For example, when the change starts (or at the time of the hold digestion), the hold shakes. An effect mode in which an effect occurs and the hold display does not change as it is (a so-called gasp pattern), and an effect mode in which the hold display change is executed thereafter may be provided.

  In the second embodiment, the hold change effect can be executed in any of the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state and the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state. It is configured to be able to execute a look-ahead effect. In addition, the present invention is not limited to this. A look-ahead effect that can be executed in the probability-variable game state and the time-reduced game state, but is not executed in the non-probability-variable game state and the time-reduced game state, and the non-probability-variable game state and the time-reduced game A look-ahead effect that may be executed in the state, but is not executed in the probability varying game state and the time reduction game state may be provided. Further, a look-ahead effect A is provided as a look-ahead effect that can be executed in a plurality of different game states or a look-ahead effect that can be executed across a plurality of different game states. When the look-ahead effect B is provided as a look-ahead effect that cannot be executed across a plurality of game states, (1) the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state and the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state are the same stay (2) Different occurrence probabilities (occurrence frequencies) of prefetching effect A, (3) Different big hit expectation degrees of prefetching effect A, (4) Different occurrence rates of prefetching effect A causing loss , And so on. In addition, when the prefetch effect is executed in the probability changing game state and the time shortening game state and in the non-probability changing game state and the time shortening game state, the prefetch effect is related to the second main game side. Note that at least one configuration may be applied to the configurations (1) to (4).

  Further, in the second embodiment, as shown in the above-described step 2661 of FIG. 30 and step 2707 of FIG. 31, the gaming state when the new hold that has occurred is consumed and the game state when the new hold occurs The game state is different from the game state (for example, the occurrence of the new hold is the probability change game state and the time reduction game state, and the game state when the new hold is exhausted is the non-probability change game state and the time reduction. In the case of the game state), the trigger hold does not occur, that is, the prefetch effect is not executed across the game state. Note that the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and as described above, a prefetch effect A is provided as a prefetch effect that can be executed in a plurality of different game states or a prefetch effect that can be executed across a plurality of different game states. The prefetching effect B may be provided as a prefetching effect that cannot be executed in a plurality of different game states or a prefetching effect that cannot be executed across a plurality of different game states.

  Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination process according to the subroutine of step 2600 in FIG. 17 in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2622 (second), that is, when the stay stage switching timing is reached in step 2602, in step 2622 (second), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S It is determined whether or not the gaming state is a time shortening gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2622 (second), “night stage” is set as the staying stage in step 2610, and in the case of No, the process of setting the staying stage in the non-time-saving game state is performed in the processes after step 2616. Execute. As described above, in the second embodiment, the “night stage”, which is the same stay stage in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state and the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state, is set. I have. The gaming machine according to the second embodiment has a non-probability-variable gaming state and a time-reduced gaming state after the predetermined number of big-hits have been completed if the jackpots won in the probability-variable gaming state continue for a predetermined number of times (in this example, three times). In this configuration, it is recognized that the game has shifted to the non-probability changing game state and the time shortening game state which are more disadvantageous to the player than the probability changing game state and the time shortening game state. It is configured to be less likely to be expected and to maintain a sense of expectation. In the second embodiment, the stay stage is configured to be the “night stage” when the time reduction game state is set, but the stay stage when the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state are set is set to the “night stage”. "And a star is displayed, and the staying stage in the non-probability-variable gaming state and the time-reducing game state is the" night stage "and the star is not displayed. However, the display mode may be made different depending on whether the game mode is the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state or the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state.

  With the above-described configuration, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, in a gaming machine having various stay stages, even when a prefetch effect is configured to be executable, the game state and the stay stage A suitable look-ahead effect corresponding to the switching is configured to be executable, and if the jackpots won in the probability variation game state are repeated a predetermined number of times, the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state after the end of the predetermined number of jackpots. In the case where it is configured to shift to the same state, the same stay stage is used for the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state and the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state. By configuring the state and the state to be difficult to distinguish, it is possible to provide a game that does not tire the player.

  In the second embodiment, the same limited frequency is used in both the case where the state changes to the probability changing game state and the time shortening game state after the end of the big hit and the case where the state changes to the non-probability changing game state and the time shortening game state. Because of the state, the timing at which the limited frequency table to be referred to is switched (limited frequency transition timing) is configured to be the same. In such a case, the limited frequency table to be referred to may be the same, or a different limited frequency table may be referred to in order to make the occurrence frequency of the reach effect different.

  In addition, in this example, the prefetch effect may be configured to be executable even during the execution of the big hit. For example, when a hold that exists at a predetermined timing during the execution of the big hit includes a hold that becomes a big hit In such a case, an effect of notifying the player that there is a jackpot held in the hold (so-called on-hold casino effect) may be executed. In addition, the held in-house play effect may be configured to be able to be executed even during the execution of the big hit that has been won in the non-probability changing game state and the time reduction game state (the winning in the probability change game state and the time reduction game state). It can also be executed during the execution of the jackpot.)

(Modification Example 1 from Second Embodiment)
In the second embodiment, the gaming machine is configured to be able to shift to the limited frequency state after the end of the special game, so that the gaming machine has a variation in the variation mode of the main game symbol. A gaming machine having such a limited frequency state is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration having a limited frequency state different from that of the second embodiment is referred to as a first modification from the second embodiment, and only the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

  In the first modification of the second embodiment, a limited frequency counter AMN52c-1 and a limited frequency counter BMN52c-2 are provided as limited frequency counters.

  First, FIG. 34 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process according to a subroutine of steps 1400 (1) and (2) in FIG. 6 in a first modification example of the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 1440 (second variation 1) to step 1443 (second variation 1), step 3300 (second variation 1), and step 3350 (second variation 1). After determining the stop symbol related to the main game symbol in step 1410, in step 1440 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN52c-1 is 0. I do. If Yes in step 1440 (second variation 1), in step 1441 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the counter value of the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2 is 0. . In the case of Yes in step 1441 (second variation 1), the process proceeds to step 1412, and the variation mode regarding the main game symbol is determined with reference to the main game table 3.

  If No in Step 1440 (Second Modification 1), in Step 3300 (Second Modification 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a limited frequency A fluctuation mode determination process described later. Next, in step 1442 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M decrements the counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN52c-1 by 1, and proceeds to step 1418. If No in Step 1441 (Second Variation 1), in Step 3350 (Second Variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a limited frequency B variation mode determination process described later. Next, in step 1443 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M decrements the counter value of the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2 by 1, and proceeds to step 1418. Although details will be described later, in the first modification example from the second embodiment, there are a plurality of limited frequency states.

  Next, FIG. 35 is a flowchart of the limited frequency A variation mode determination processing according to the subroutine of step 3300 (second variation 1) in FIG. 34 in the first modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 3302, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines that the counter value GA of the limited frequency counter AMN52c-1 is within the first stage range (the first stage limited frequency counter in the limited frequency state having three stages). A is within the range of the counter value of A, and it is determined whether or not 100 ≧ GA> 20). In the case of Yes in step 3302, in step 3304, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency table A1 based on the random number of the main game side and the result of the lottery, and the variation mode (variable time) related to the main game symbol. Is determined, and the process moves to the next process {the process of step 1442 (second variation 1)}.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3302, in step 3306, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the counter value GA of the limited frequency counter AMN52c-1 is within the second step range (2 in the limited frequency state having three steps). It is determined whether or not the value is within the range of the counter value of the limited frequency counter A, which is the stage, and 20 ≧ GA> 1). In the case of Yes in step 3306, in step 3308, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency table A2 based on the random number of the main game side, the result of the lottery lottery, and the number of holdings to change the main game symbol ( (Variation time) is determined, and the flow shifts to the next process {the process of step 1442 (second variation 1)}. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3306, in other words, the counter value GA of the limited frequency counter AMN52c-1 falls within the third stage range (the limited frequency counter A in the third stage in the limited frequency state having three stages). If it is within the range of the counter value and GA = 1), in step 3310, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency table A3 based on the random number of the main game side and the result of the lottery determination. The variation mode (variation time) related to the game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process {the process of step 1442 (second variation 1)}.

  Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the limited frequency B variation mode determination processing according to the subroutine of step 3350 (second variation 1) in FIG. 34 in the first modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 3352, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the counter value GB of the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2 is within the first step range (the first step of the limited frequency counter in the limited frequency state having three steps). B is within the range of the counter value, and it is determined whether or not 80 ≧ GB> 21). If Yes in step 3352, in step 3354, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency table B <b> 1 based on the random number on the main game side and the result of the lottery lottery to change the fluctuation mode (variation time) for the main game symbol. Is determined, and the flow shifts to the next process {the process of step 1443 (second variation 1)}.

  On the other hand, in the case of No at Step 3352, at Step 3356, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value GB of the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2 within the second step range (2 in the limited frequency state having three steps). It is determined whether or not the value is within the range of the counter value of the limited frequency counter B, which is the stage, and GB = 21). If Yes in step 3356, in step 3358, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency table B <b> 2 based on the random number of the main game side and the result of the lottery lottery, and the variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol. Is determined, and the flow shifts to the next process {the process of step 1443 (second variation 1)}. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 3356, in other words, the counter value GB of the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2 falls within the third step range (the third step of the limited frequency counter B in the limited frequency state having three steps). If it is within the range of the counter value and GB ≦ 20), in step 3360, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency table B3 based on the random number of the main game side, the result of the lottery lottery, and the number of holdings. Then, a variation mode (variation time) relating to the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process {the process of step 1443 (second variation 1)}. As described above, in the first modification from the second embodiment, there are two types of limited frequency states (a limited frequency state A in which the limited frequency counter A is subtracted and a limited frequency state B in which the limited frequency counter B is subtracted). If the limited frequency state is different, the timing for switching the limited frequency table to be referred to (limited frequency transition timing) is different.

  Next, FIG. 37 is an example of limited frequency tables A1 to A3 and B1 to B3 in the first modification example from the second embodiment. First, the limited frequency table A1 has the same configuration as the limited frequency table 1 in the second embodiment. Next, the limited frequency table A2 has the same configuration as the limited frequency table 2 in the second embodiment. Next, the limited frequency table A3 has the same configuration as the limited frequency table 3 in the second embodiment. Next, the limited frequency table B1 has the same configuration as the limited frequency table 1 in the second embodiment. Next, the limited frequency table B2 has the same configuration as the limited frequency table 3 in the second embodiment. Next, the limited frequency table B3 has the same configuration as the limited frequency table 2 in the second embodiment. The table contents related to the game state will be described later.

  Next, FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game, according to the subroutine of step 1750 (second modification 1) in FIG. 15 in the first modification example from the second embodiment. First, in step 1785-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change flag. Next, in step 1785-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a certain number of times (80 times in this example) to the probability change counter MP51c. Next, in step 1785-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the currently stopped big hit symbol is a big hit symbol with a relatively large number of time savings, and in this example, the big hit symbol is 7A. 7B) is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1785-4, in step 1785-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the number of long / shortening times (a relatively large number of time savings, which is 100 in this example) in the time / shortening time counter MP52c. I do. Next, in step 1785-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (100 times in this example) to the limited frequency counter AMN52c-1, and proceeds to step 1785-10. Note that the limited frequency counter value is configured to be cleared to zero when a special game is won.

  In the case of No in step 1785-4, in other words, the stopped big hit symbol is a short hit short-time hit big hit symbol (a hit hit symbol with a relatively small number of time savings, which is 5A / 5B in this example). In some cases, in step 1785-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the number of times of short time reduction (60 times in this example) to the time reduction number counter MP52c. Next, in step 1785-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (80 times in this example) to the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2, and proceeds to step 1785-10. Note that the limited frequency counter value is configured to be cleared to zero when a special game is won. Next, in steps 1785-10 and 1785-11, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game time reduction flag and the main game time reduction flag, and proceeds to the next process (the process in step 1997). In addition, in the modification example 1 from the second embodiment, according to the type of the big hit symbol or according to the game state when the big hit (opening time extension function is activated) or the big hit on the first main game side is won. Depending on whether the second main game side has won a big hit, the tendency of the limited frequency state after the big hit may be different, and in such a case, the limited frequency state A and the limited frequency state B, it may be determined whether to be the limited frequency state A or the limited frequency state B, and it may be determined which of the limited frequency state A and the limited frequency state B is likely to occur (for example, , The second main game side or the time shortened game state is more likely to shift to the limited frequency state where the number of times saved is larger.

  As described above, in the first modification example from the second embodiment, the number of time savings given after the end of the big hit according to the big hit symbol is different depending on the big hit symbol. If the number of time savings is greater than the number of probability changes, a predetermined value is set in the limited frequency counter AMN52c-1, that is, the state shifts to the limited frequency state A. In this case, a predetermined value is set to the limited frequency counter BMN 52c-1, that is, the state shifts to the limited frequency state B.

  With the configuration as described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification example from the second embodiment, the limited frequency state and the transition mode of the limited frequency state are configured to have a plurality of types, and the big hit symbol By making the transition mode of the limited frequency state and the limited frequency state after the end of the big hit different, it is possible to make the gaming machine more interesting. In addition, as in the configuration of the present embodiment, the probability change frequency and the time reduction frequency are configured to be different from each other, and there are cases where the time reduction frequency is less than the probability variation frequency and the time reduction frequency is greater than the probability variation frequency depending on the big hit symbol. With such a configuration and a configuration in which the limited frequency state and the transition mode of the limited frequency state are different in the two cases, the interest of the game is further enhanced.

  In the first modification example from the second embodiment, when the number of times saved is greater than the number of times of probability change, the number of limited frequency transitions in the probability variation game state and the time shortened game state (the number of times the limited frequency table to be referred is switched) ) Is one, while the number of limited frequency transitions in the non-probability-variable gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state is two, which is less than the number of limited frequency transitions in the probability-variable gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state. The number of limited frequency transitions in the probability varying game state and the time reduction game state is larger. Further, when the number of times saved is less than the number of times of probability change, the number of limited frequency transitions (the number of times to switch the limited frequency table to be referred) in the probability-variable game state and the time-reduced game state is one, while the non-probability-variable game is performed. The number of limited frequency transitions in the state and the time-reduced game state is 0 (there is no such game state), and the probability change is less probable than the limited frequency transition number in the game state and the time-reduced game state. In the gaming state and the time reduction gaming state, the number of limited frequency transitions is smaller. In addition, it is not limited to such a configuration, and the number of limited frequency transitions in the non-probability variable gaming state and the time shortened gaming state is always greater than the number of limited frequency transitions in the probability varying gaming state and the time shortened gaming state. It may be configured such that the number of limited frequency transitions in the non-probability-variable game state and the time-reduced game state is smaller than the number of limited frequency transitions in the probability-variable game state and the time-reduced game state. May be. In addition, the difference between the limited frequency transition in the probability-variable gaming state and the time-reduced game state and the limited frequency transition in the non-probability-variable gaming state and the time-reduced game state are not limited to only the limited frequency number. For example, A configuration in which the number of transitions to the limited frequency state in which the occurrence frequency of the reach variation (for example, a symbol variation having a variation time of 30 seconds or more) is different and the period of staying in the limited frequency state in which the reach variation occurs frequently are different. May be.

  In addition, in the first modification example from the second embodiment, the final fluctuation (the 60th fluctuation after the end of the big hit) of the probability fluctuation game state and the time reduction game state when the number of time savings is smaller than the number of times of probability fluctuation is a fluctuation of 5 seconds. When the time is selected, the final change (the 60th change after the end of the big hit) of the probability fluctuation game state and the time reduction game state when the number of times saved is larger than the number of times of probability change is selected from 1 second or 3 seconds. The variation time (the average value of the selected variation time) of the final variation in the probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state is different between the case where the number of times saved is less than the number of times of probability variation and the case where the number of times saved is less. It is configured as follows. The difference between the case where the number of times saved is larger than the number of times of probability change and the case where the number of times saved is less than the number of times of probability change is not limited to this, and the difference relating to the final change in the probability-variable game state and the time-reduced game state is not limited thereto. (2) whether or not to perform an effect that encourages the player to determine whether or not it can be different depending on the number of holds, (2) whether or not to end the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state, It may be configured such that the longest change time to be obtained is different and (4) the shortest time that can be selected is different.

  Further, in the second embodiment and the first modification example from the second embodiment, in the distribution game execution round in the special game execution (when a game ball enters the specific area C22, the probability variation game state is set after the special game ends). A configuration may be adopted in which a game ball enters the specific area C22 in a round in which the game is shifted, so that the game is shifted to the probability-variation game state after the end of the special game (a so-called ball game machine).

  In addition, in the first modification example from the second embodiment, the limited frequency transition number is different between the case where the number of time savings is larger than the number of times of the probability change and the case where the number of time savings is less than the number of times of the probability change in the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the frequency of occurrence of reach fluctuation, the appearance rate of the fluctuation time that is longer than the predetermined time, the appearance rate of the fluctuation time that is shorter than the predetermined time, and the like may be different. (1) Apply only to the second main game side, (2) Apply only to the design change that causes loss, (3) Apply only to the second main game side and the design change that causes loss May be. Further, the above limitations (1) to (3) are not limited only to the comparison between the case where the number of time savings is larger than the number of times of probability change and the case where the number of times is smaller than the number of times of probability variation, and the variation in all the embodiments shown in this example. It should be added that the limitation of (1) to (3) may be applied to the comparison of the modes (the fluctuation time and the fluctuation tendency) and the comparison of the production mode (the production tendency).

Further, in the first modification example from the second embodiment, the following configuration may be applied.
(1) The change mode determination table referred to in the probability change game state and the time reduction game state and the change mode determination table referred to in the non-probability change game state and the time reduction game state are configured to have the same table contents.
(2) The change mode determination table referred to in the probability change game state and the time reduction game state and the change mode determination table referred to in the non-probability change game state and the time reduction game state are configured to have different table contents.

(Third embodiment)
In the present embodiment, a configuration in which the number of times saved after the end of the special game is completed has a plurality of types to enhance the interest in the time-reduced game state is provided. It is not limited only to the configuration of the form. Therefore, a configuration of a time shortening game state different from the present embodiment is referred to as a third embodiment, and only the differences from the present embodiment will be described below in detail.

  First, FIG. 39 is a drawing showing a basic structure on the front side of a gaming machine in the third embodiment. Hereinafter, only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail.

  First, in the third embodiment, two first main game start ports AA10 in the center of the game area and a first main game start port BA12 on the right side of the game area (based on the center of the game area). Is provided. Also, a game ball that the player performs left-handed and flows down the left side of the game area (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the first main game start port AA10, and is hardly guided to other entrances. The game ball, which is configured so that the player performs a right strike and flows down the right side of the game area (based on the center of the game area), has a distribution ball inlet C20, a second main game start port B10, and a first main game start port B10. The game starting port BA12, the auxiliary game starting port H10, and the special winning port C10 are easily guided to the first main game starting port AA10. Furthermore, the game ball that the player performs right-handed and flows down the right side of the game area (based on the center of the game area) is a distribution ball inlet C20, a second main game start port B10, and a first main game start port BA12. , The auxiliary game starting port H10 and the special winning port C10. Further, the first main game starting port BA12 is provided with a first non-motorized accessory A12hd, and when the first non-motorized accessory A12hd is in a closed state, a game ball is placed in the first main game starting port BA12. When it is difficult to enter the ball and the first non-motorized accessory A12hd is in an open state, the game ball is configured to easily enter the first main game start port BA12. The second main game starting port B10 is provided with a second non-motorized accessory B10hd. When the second non-motorized accessory B10hd is in the closed state, the game ball is moved to the second main game starting port B10. It is configured such that when the second non-motor-powered accessory B10hd is in the open state, the game ball easily enters the second main game start port B10. Note that “easy to be guided” and “difficult to be guided” are determined, for example, by the number of entering balls when 10,000 game balls are fired on the right and left sides, respectively. In the third embodiment, only one special winning opening is provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and two special winning openings may be provided. Note that the flow of the game of the third embodiment is a game method in which a non-probability varying game state and a non-time shortening game state are shot leftward (a game ball is fired so that the game ball flows down the left side of the game board). The game proceeds with the game ball being fired at a relatively low firing intensity) and other game states (probability-variable game state and time-reduced game state, non-probability-variable game state and time-reduced game state) In the configuration, the game is played by right-handing (a game method in which the game ball is fired so that the game ball flows down the right side of the game board, and the game ball is fired at a relatively high firing intensity). Have been.

  Next, FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating the internal structure of the sorting entrance C20 according to the third embodiment. Inside the distribution entrance C20, a first open entrance C22 (first open entrance detection device) in which the first non-motorized accessory A12hd is opened when a game ball enters. C22s), the second open ball entrance C23 (the second open ball entrance detection device C23s) in which the second non-motorized accessory B10hd is opened when the game ball enters, and the dispensing. It has a distributing member C24 for distributing a game ball entered into the ball opening C20 to a first open ball entrance C22 and a second open ball entrance C23.

  First, the operation in the upper part of the figure will be described in detail. When the distribution member C24 is in the first mode, the distribution member C24 is swung rightward so as to close the flow path to the second open ball entrance C23. The game ball that has entered the sorting entrance C20 is configured to easily enter the first open entrance C22 and is unlikely to enter the second open entrance C23. Next, the operation in the lower part of the figure will be described in detail. When the distribution member C24 is in the second mode, the distribution member C24 is swung to the left so as to block the flow path to the first open ball entrance C22. The game ball that has entered the sorting entrance C20 is configured not to easily enter the first open entrance C22 and to easily enter the second open entrance C23. In addition, as described below, the distribution member is configured to start driving from the first opening timing when the electric accessory D10d is opened, and to be driven in a “first mode → second mode → first mode”. Have been.

  Next, FIG. 41 is a main flowchart showing a flow of a general process performed by the main game board M according to the third embodiment. First, the points different from the present embodiment are steps 1800 (third) to step 1900 (third) in the processing at the time of the timer interrupt, that is, in step 1700, the CPUMC of the main control board M performs the special game control. After the processing is executed, in Step 1800 (third), a distributing member drive control processing described later is executed. Next, in step 1850 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a first non-electrical accessory driving control process described later. Next, in step 1900 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a second non-electrical accessory driving control process described later, and proceeds to step 1997.

  Next, FIG. 42 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 41 in the third embodiment. First, a change from the present embodiment is the contents of the auxiliary game stop symbol determination lottery table, that is, the opening mode of the electric accessory. In the third embodiment, the auxiliary game time reduction flag is used as the auxiliary game time reduction flag. Two types of auxiliary game time reduction flags, A and an auxiliary game time reduction flag B, are provided. In addition, the opening mode of the auxiliary gaming electric auditors product D10d is configured to be different depending on the type of the auxiliary gaming time reduction flag that is turned on. With this configuration, the auxiliary gaming time reduction flag that is turned on is set. The timing at which the game ball enters the sorting ball entrance C20 can be made different, and the game ball enters the first opening ball opening C22 and the second opening ball opening C23 in accordance with the driving of the sorting member C24. Can be distributed (details will be described later). Specifically, when the auxiliary game time reduction flag A is on, the opening mode of the electric accessory D10d is “3.0 seconds opening → 0.2 seconds closing → 0.2 seconds opening → 0.2 seconds closing → It is "0.2 seconds open → closed", and the opening (long open) of 3.0 seconds at which the game ball can easily enter is the first half of the open period. When the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is ON, the opening state of the electric accessory D10d is “open 0.2 seconds → close 0.2 seconds → open 0.2 seconds → close 3.0 seconds → 4. It is "0 second open", and the 4.0 second open (long open) in which the game ball can easily enter is the latter half of the open period. Note that, during the long opening period, the time when the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is on is longer than when the auxiliary game time reduction flag A is on, and the total time of opening is also shorter than the time when the auxiliary game time reduction flag A is on. The case where the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is on is longer than the case where the flag A is on. At the same time, the driving mode of the distribution member C24 is “3.6 seconds first mode (guided to the first open ball entrance C22) → 4.0 seconds second mode (guided to the second open ball ground port C23)”. It has become. With this configuration, when the auxiliary game time reduction flag A is on, the ball enters the first open ball entrance C22, and when the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is on, the ball enters the second open ball entrance C22. It is configured to be. In this example, when the auxiliary game time reduction flag (the auxiliary game time reduction flag A and the auxiliary game time reduction flag B) is off, the winning probability on the auxiliary game side may be set to 0 (no winning). In such a case, a random number for determining an auxiliary game variation time may be acquired, and the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol may be determined based on the random number. In addition, the candidate of the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol is determined in the same auxiliary game side game state (auxiliary game time reduction flag A on, auxiliary game time reduction flag B on, auxiliary game time reduction flag A and auxiliary game time reduction flag B off). You may comprise so that it may have two or more, and may have only one candidate of the fluctuation | variation time of an auxiliary game symbol in the game state of all the auxiliary game side. In the case of such a configuration, the configuration may be such that the random number for determining the auxiliary game fluctuation time is not provided.

  Next, FIG. 43 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display device according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. 10 in the third embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 3150 (third), that is, after the variable flag is turned off in step 1434, the CPUMC of the main control board M is described later in step 3150 (third). The promotion count control process is performed, and the process proceeds to step 1550.

  Next, FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the promotion count control processing according to the subroutine of step 3150 (third) of FIG. 43 in the third embodiment. First, in step 3152, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol relating to the current main game symbol is a big hit symbol. If Yes in step 3152, in step 3154, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the condition device operation flag. Next, in step 3156, the CPUMC of the main control board M conceals that the game is in the probability-variation gaming state in a period from the end of the special game until a predetermined number of symbol fluctuations have elapsed from the end of the special game. In order to notify that the game is in the probability variation gaming state at the timing when the number of symbol fluctuations has elapsed, the counter for measuring the predetermined number of symbol fluctuations) is cleared to zero. Next, in step 3158, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the promotion count flag (a flag for executing the measurement of the promotion counter when it is on), and proceeds to step 3160. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 3152, the processing shifts to step 3160.

  Next, in step 3160, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the promotion count flag (the flag which is turned on in step 1764) is on. If Yes in step 3160, in step 3162, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the stage promotion counter. Next, in step 3164, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the stage promotion counter value is the same as the stage switching value / the number of time savings after the end of the big hit relating to the non-probable variable big hit symbol (2A / 2B). Then, it is determined whether or not it is 10 °. If Yes in step 3164, in step 3166, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a stage promotion command (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the next process Then, the processing shifts to (processing of step 1550). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 3160 or step 3164, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1550).

  Next, FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. 43 in the third embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is step 1569 (third) and step 1578 (third), that is, in step 1569 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability change flag. Is determined. If Yes in step 1569 (third), the process proceeds to step 1570, and if No, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 1600). Further, in step 1576, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game time reduction flag, and then in step 1578 (third), the auxiliary game time reduction flag (auxiliary game time reduction flag A / auxiliary game time reduction flag B). Is turned off, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 1600). As described above, in the third embodiment, when the game shifts to the probability variation game state after the end of the special game, the probability variation game state can be maintained until the next big hit is won. Does not end the probability variation game state).

  Next, FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the special game operation condition determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. 41 in the third embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is step 1604 (third), that is, if the condition device operation flag is on in step 1602, the CPUMC of the main control board M Turns off the specific game flags (main game probability change flag / main game time reduction flag / auxiliary game time reduction flag A / auxiliary game time reduction flag B), and proceeds to step 1606.

  Next, FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the specific game according to the subroutine of step 1750 (third) of FIG. 15 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1752, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the stop symbol related to the current main game symbol is a jackpot symbol that will shift to the probability-variable gaming state after the end of the special game, and 3A, 5A, 7A, 5B, and 7B). If Yes in step 1752, in step 1754, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change flag, and proceeds to step 1756. On the other hand, if No in step 1752 (when the stopped symbols are 2A and 2B), the flow shifts to step 1756.

  Next, in step 1756, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the stop symbol related to the main game symbol is a time-saving A big hit symbol (a big hit symbol in which the auxiliary game time-saving flag A is turned on after the end of the special game, and 3A). Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1756, the auxiliary game time reduction flag A is turned on in step 1758, and the flow shifts to step 1768. In the case of No in step 1756, in step 1760, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the stop symbol relating to the main game symbol is a time-saving B big hit symbol (a large hit symbol in which the auxiliary game time-saving flag B is turned on after the end of the special game). , 5A, 7A, 5B, 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1760, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game time reduction flag B in step 1762. As described above, in the third embodiment, the auxiliary game time reduction flag that is turned on after the end of the special game related to the big hit symbol may be different depending on the stopped big hit symbol (the auxiliary game time reduction flag A and the auxiliary game time reduction flag B are different from each other). Is turned on), that is, the time reduction gaming state can be different. Hereinafter, a state in which the auxiliary game time reduction flag A is on may be referred to as a time reduction game state A, and a state in which the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is on may be referred to as a time reduction game state B. Next, in step 1763, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the stop symbol related to the main game symbol is shifted to the probability variation game state after the end of the special game. It is a big hit symbol that keeps the player from being in the probability-variation gaming state until the symbol change elapses, and it is determined whether or not it is 5A, 5B). If Yes in step 1763, in step 1764, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the promotion count flag (which is a flag for measuring the number of times of change since the end of the special game referred when changing the stay stage). Then, the process proceeds to step 1768. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1763, the process moves to step 1768. If No in step 1760 (when the stop symbols are 2A and 2B), in step 1765, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (10 in this example) to the number-of-time-saving counter. Next, in step 1766, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game time reduction flag B, and proceeds to step 1768. It should be noted that, in two states, that is, when the promotion count flag is turned on in step 1764 and when a predetermined value (10 times in this example) is set in the time-saving counter MP52c in step 1765, the same applies after the end of the special game. As an effect, it is configured to execute an effect for the player to inquire whether or not the current game state is the probability-variable game state. Here, if the opening state of the electric accessory is different in the two states, the player will determine whether or not the current probability varying game state is present regardless of the result of the effect. In order to prevent such a situation, in the third embodiment, the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is turned on in any of the two states. Next, in step 1768, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time reduction flag, and proceeds to the next processing {the processing of step 1800 (third)}. As described above, in the third embodiment, whether the auxiliary game time reduction flag A is turned on or the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is turned on as the auxiliary game time reduction flag (the time reduction game state A or the time reduction game state B Is determined according to the type of the big hit symbol (it does not depend on the gaming state at the time of the big hit winning). There is a case where the game state shifts to the probability changing game state and the time shortening game state B, and a case where the game mode shifts to the non-probability changing game state and the time shortening game state B. In addition, in this example, it is configured such that the non-probability variable gaming state and the time shortened gaming state B are set after the big hit related to the big hit symbol “2A · 2B” which becomes the non-probability variable gaming state after the big hit end. After the big hit pertaining to “2A · 2B”, the non-probability changing game state and the time shortening game state A may be configured. The non-probability changing game state and the time reduction game state A may be configured even after the end of the big hit related to “5A / 5B”.

  In the third embodiment, the rate at which the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is turned on after the end of the special game, in other words, the rate at which the time is reduced to the time-reduced game state B after the end of the special game, is determined by the end of the special game on the first main game side. After that, it is "524/1024", after the special game on the second main game side is "1024/1024", and after the special game on the second main game side, the special game on the first main game side. It is configured such that the ratio of the time reduction gaming state B is higher than after the end (the time reduction after the end of the special game on the second main game side is shorter than that after the end of the special game on the first main game side). The state A is configured to have a lower ratio), in other words, when the state after the end of the special game on the second main game side shifts to the time shortening game state after the end of the special game on the first main game side. , The ratio of time reduction gaming state B is high Ratio is a time reduction gaming state A is low) as configuration. Note that the ratio of the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state B after the special game ends is “324/1024” after the special game on the first main game side, and after the special game on the second main game side. Is "824/1024", and is configured such that the ratio of the time reduction gaming state B after the end of the special game on the second main game side is higher than that after the end of the special game on the first main game side. The number of execution rounds of the big hit in the third embodiment is the same as that of the present embodiment, and “2B / 5B” is “2R”, “2A / 3A / 5A / 7A” is “4R”, and “7B” is “2R”. 16R ". The average value of the number of execution rounds in the big hit on the first main game side is “2R × 200/1024 + 4R × 824/1024 = 3.61R”, and the average value of the number of execution rounds in the big hit on the second main game side is Since “2R × 200/1024 + 4R × 50/1024 + 16R × 774/1024 = 12.67R”, the average value of the number of execution rounds is larger in the second main game side big hit than in the first main game side big hit. Is large, that is, the expected value of the number of winning prize balls at the big hit is large. In addition, comparing the probability variable jackpot that will shift to the probability variation gaming state after the jackpot ends, the average value of the number of execution rounds in the probability variable jackpot on the first main game side is “4R × 824/824 = 4R”. Since the average value of the number of execution rounds in the jackpot on the second main game side is “4R × 50/824 + 16R × 774/824 = 15.3R”, the second round is larger than the jackpot on the first main game side. The average value of the number of execution rounds in the big hit on the main game side is larger, that is, the expected value of the number of prize balls acquired in the big hit is larger. In addition, if the probability variation jackpot that shifts to the non-probability variation game state after the jackpot is completed is similarly compared, the average value of the number of execution rounds in the probability variation jackpot on the first main game side is “4R × 200/200 = 4R”. Since the average value of the number of execution rounds in the jackpot of the second main game side is “2R × 200/200 = 2R”, the jackpot of the second main game side is larger than the jackpot of the first main game side. Is smaller in the average value of the number of execution rounds, that is, the expected value of the number of prize balls acquired in the big hit is smaller. In addition, among the big hits on the first main game side, the big hit that shifts to the probability variation game state after the end of the big hit has a big hit that shifts to the time shortened game state A and a big hit that shifts to the time shortened game state B. On the other hand, among the big hits on the second main game side, only the big hit that shifts to the time-reduced game state B is provided as the big hit that shifts to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the big hit.

  Next, FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the distribution member drive control process in the subroutine of step 1800 (third) of FIG. 41 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1802, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the distribution member driving flag (a flag that is turned on during a period in which the distribution member is driven based on the opening of the electric accessory) is off. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1802, in step 1804, the CPUMC of the main control board M has reached the first opening timing of the electric accessory (the driving of the distribution member is started from the timing when the electric accessory is first opened). Is determined). If Yes in step 1804, in step 1806, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets an initial value (7.6 in this example) in a distribution member drive timer (decrement timer) and starts. Next, in step 1808, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the distribution member driving flag, and proceeds to step 1810. It should be noted that also in the case of No in Step 1802, the process proceeds to Step 1810. Next, in step 1810, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the distribution member drive timer value has reached the drive switching timing (timer value = 4.0) (the distribution member drive timer is a decrement timer. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the distribution member drive timer value at the timing of 3.6 seconds from the start of the driving of the distribution member is 4.0). In the case of Yes in step 1810, in step 1812, the CPUMC of the main control board M drives the distribution member from the first mode to the second mode (the initial position is the first mode), and the next processing # The process proceeds to step 1850 (third) process #. If No in step 1810, in step 1814, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the distribution member drive timer value is 0. If Yes in step 1814, in step 1816, the CPUMC of the main control board M drives the distribution member from the second mode to the first mode. Next, in step 1818, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the distribution member driving flag, and shifts to the next processing {the processing of step 1850 (third)}. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1804 or 1814, the processing shifts to the next processing {the processing of step 1850 (third)}.

  Next, the middle part of FIG. 48 is an operation diagram of the electric accessory and the distribution member. First, the distribution member C22 is driven from the first mode (initial position) to the second mode at a predetermined timing (3.6 seconds from the start of driving). Here, in the case of the time shortening gaming state A, the electric accessory is long open during the period in which the distribution member is the first mode (3.0 seconds, which is the first half of the opening period of the electric accessory described above). Open), and it becomes easy to enter the game ball. On the other hand, in the time shortening game state B, the electric accessory is long opened during the period in which the distribution member is in the second mode (4.0 seconds, which is the latter half of the opening period of the electric accessory described above). (Open) to facilitate the entry of game balls. In addition, the lower part of FIG. 48 is a table showing an opening state of the electric accessory and a displacement state of the distribution member. As described above, the opening pattern of the electric accessory is such that when the auxiliary game time saving flag B is on, the total opening time of the electric accessory or the (multiple opening time) than when the auxiliary game time saving flag A is on. The maximum opening time is longer, and the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is turned on, and the game ball to the sorting ball opening is relatively relatively formed when the auxiliary game time reduction flag A is turned on. It is easy to enter the ball. In addition, as described above, in the case of the first mode, the distribution member guides the game ball to enter the first open ball entrance C22 (performs the lottery according to the first main game symbol), In the case of the second aspect, the game ball is guided to enter the second open entrance C23 (to execute a lottery according to the second main game symbol). With this configuration, even in one probability-variable gaming state, different gaming states such as gaming properties and profit rates are determined depending on whether the time-saving gaming state is the time-saving gaming state A or the time-saving gaming state B. It is possible to have a plurality.

  Next, FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the first non-electrical accessory drive control process according to the subroutine of step 1850 (third) of FIG. 41 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1852, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first non-motorized accessory opening flag (a flag that is turned on while the first non-motorized accessory A12hd is open) is off. . If Yes in step 1852, in step 1854, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first open entrance C22. In the case of Yes in step 1854, in step 1856, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first non-motorized accessory opening flag. Next, in step 1858, the CPUMC of the main control board M releases the first non-motorized accessory A12hd, and proceeds to the next processing {the processing of step 1900 (third)}. Further, in the case of No in Step 1852, in Step 1860, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the predetermined number of the first main game starting port BA12 (the number of entering balls at which the first non-motorized accessory A12hd is closed). , Two in this example) have entered. If Yes in step 1860, in step 1862, the CPUMC of the main control board M does not satisfy the error occurrence condition (in the present example, the first non-motorized It is determined whether or not A12hd is released and an error occurs when the auxiliary game time reduction flag A is off at the timing of Yes in step 1860). In the case of Yes in step 1862, in step 1864, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the first non-motor-operated accessory A12hd. Next, in step 1866, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first non-motor-operated accessory opening flag, and proceeds to the next process {the process of step 1900 (third)}. Note that also in the case of No in step 1860 or step 1854, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1900 (third)). If No in step 1862, an error is reported in step 1868, and error processing is executed (error recovery conditions include, for example, power-off → on, RAM clear, Etc.). As described above, in the third embodiment, even if a game ball enters the first main game start port BA12 in a situation where the auxiliary game time reduction flag A is off, it is not immediately determined that an error has occurred. The first non-motorized accessory A12hd is opened when the auxiliary game time reduction flag A is off, and the first non-electrical accessory A12hd is closed when the auxiliary game time reduction flag A is off. A predetermined number of game balls (in the present example, the number is two, but it is sufficient that the first non-motorized accessory A12hd is equal to or more than the number of incoming balls at which the first non-motor-operated accessory A12hd changes from the open state to the closed state). It is configured to determine that an error has occurred when the ball has entered the first main game start port BA12. In the third embodiment, when the auxiliary game time reduction flag A is on, the first non-electric combination A12hd is opened, and then, when the auxiliary game time reduction flag A is turned off after one change, The auxiliary game time reduction flag A is off and the first non-motorized character A12hd is being opened. In such a case, an error is not made. In this case, the auxiliary game time reduction flag A is turned off when the first non-motorized character A12hd is opened. The error condition is that the auxiliary game time reduction flag A is off even when the first non-motorized accessory A12hd is closed.

  Next, FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the second non-electrical accessory drive control process according to the subroutine of step 1900 (third) of FIG. 41 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1902, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the second non-motorized accessory opening flag (a flag that is turned on while the second non-electric accessory B10hd is open) is off. . If Yes in step 1902, in step 1904, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the ball has entered the second open entrance C23. In the case of Yes in step 1904, in step 1906, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the second non-motorized accessory opening flag. Next, in Step 1908, the CPUMC of the main control board M releases the second non-motorized accessory B10hd, and proceeds to the next processing {the processing of Step 1900 (third)}. Further, in the case of No in Step 1902, in Step 1910, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number (the number of balls to be closed when the second non-motorized accessory B10hd is closed) in the second main game start port B10. , Two in this example) have entered. In the case of Yes in step 1910, in step 1912, the CPUMC of the main control board M does not satisfy the error occurrence condition (when the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is off, the second non-motorized accessory B10 is opened. Then, it is determined whether or not an error occurs when the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is off at the timing of “Yes” in the step 1910). In the case of Yes in Step 1912, in Step 1914, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second non-motorized accessory B10hd. Next, in step 1916, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the second non-motorized accessory opening flag, and shifts to the next process (the process in step 1997). Note that also in the case of No in step 1910 or step 1904, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1997). If No in step 1912, an error is reported in step 1918, and error processing is executed (error recovery conditions include, for example, power off → on, RAM clear, Etc.). As described above, in the third embodiment, even if a game ball enters the second main game start port B10 in a state where the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is off, it is not immediately determined that an error has occurred. The second non-motorized character B10hd is opened when the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is off, and the second non-motorized character B10hd is closed when the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is off. A predetermined number of game balls (in the present example, two, but it is sufficient if the number of entering balls at which the second non-motorized accessory B10hd is changed from the open state to the closed state is sufficient), and three or more game balls are acceptable. It is configured to determine that an error has occurred when the ball has entered the second main game start port B10. In addition, the number of balls entering the error is determined by counting the number of balls entering the first main game starting port BA12 when the first main game starting port BA12 is in error, and by measuring the number of balls entering the second main game starting port B12 when the error is in the second main game starting port B12. It is configured to measure an error in the mouth B10 and determine an error. One ball enters the first main game starting port BA12, and one ball enters the second main game starting port B10, for a total of two balls. It is not configured to determine an error because it has hit the ball. In the third embodiment, when the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is on, the second non-motor-operated accessory B10hd is opened, and when the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is turned off after one change, The auxiliary game time reduction flag B is off and the second non-electrically driven character B10hd is being opened. In such a case, an error is not generated. Therefore, when the second non-electrically driven character B10hd is opened, the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is turned off. The error condition is that the auxiliary game time saving flag B is off even when the second non-motor-driven accessory B10hd is closed.

  Next, FIG. 51 is a flowchart of a special game-related display control process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. 17 in the third embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is step 2514 (third) to step 2518 (third), that is, in step 2512, the CPUSC of the sub control board S successively displays the number of rounds and the number of winnings. After setting the command to execute, in step 2514 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the stop symbol related to the current main game symbol is the probability change transition notification jackpot symbol (the game state after the end of the special game is the probability variation game). It is a big hit symbol for notifying the state during the special game, and it is determined whether or not it is 3A, 7A, 7B). In the case of Yes at step 2514 (third), at step 2516 (third), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs the probability change transition notification effect as the large hit effect (the game state after the end of the big hit is the probability fluctuation game state). Is set, and the process proceeds to step 2520. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2514 (third), that is, the stop symbol related to the current main game symbol is a probability change non-report big hit symbol (a big hit that does not notify whether or not to shift to the probability fluctuation game state after the end of the special game). If the pattern is 2A, 5A, 2B, 5B), in step 2518 (third), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the non-reporting transition to the probable change transition as a large hit effect (the game state after the big hit is A command to execute an effect that does not notify whether or not the player is in the variable game state is set, and the flow shifts to step 2520. As described above, in the third embodiment, during the execution of the jackpot according to the probability change transition notification jackpot symbol, the probability change transition notification effect is executed, and after the end of the jackpot, the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state A, or the probability While notifying that the game has shifted to the gain-variable gaming state and the time-reducing gaming state B, during the execution of the jackpot relating to the probability-change-based non-notification jackpot symbol, a probability-change-based non-reporting effect is executed, and after the end of the jackpot, the probability gain variation game It is configured not to notify whether the state and the time-reduced game state B are to be shifted to the non-probability-obtained variable game state and the time-reduced game state B. In addition, in the big hit according to the probability change notification big hit symbol, it may be notified at the start of the big hit that the game will be shifted to the probability fluctuation game state after the big hit end. In addition, during the big hit related to “7A ・ 7B”, it is notified that the probability shift gaming state and the time shortening game state B are shifted after the big hit is completed, and the probability changing gaming state and time are set after the big hit is completed during the big hit related to “3A”. Notify the transition to the shortened game state A, and during the big hit related to "2A / 5A / 2B / 5B", notify only the transition to the time shortened game state B after the end of the big hit and transition to the probability variation game state? It is configured not to notify whether or not it is.

  Next, FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2600 (third) of FIG. First, in step 2624, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the stay stage switching timing, which is, for example, the timing at which the special game has ended (was won), the timing at which the game state has shifted, It is determined whether or not｝. In the case of Yes in step 2624, in step 2626, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the stopped big hit symbol is the time saving B fixed symbol (7A, 7B). In the case of Yes in step 2626, in step 2628, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets “night stage” as the stay stage, and proceeds to step 2634. If No in step 2626, in step 2630, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the stopped big hit symbol is the time-saving A fixed symbol (3A). If Yes in step 2630, in step 2631, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets “evening stage” as the stay stage, and proceeds to step 2634. In the case of No in step 2630 (the stopped big hit symbol is 2A, 2B, 5A, 5B), in step 2632, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the “chance stage” as the staying stage (in the probability fluctuation game state). Or a non-probability fluctuation game state).

  Next, in step 2634, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether a stage promotion command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2634 (received when the symbol change is executed ten times in the situation where the probability change game state and the stay stage are the “chance stage” after the end of the big hit), in step 2636, the sub control board S CPUSC sets the “night stage” as the staying stage (if the game is in the probability varying game state after the “chance stage” ends, the process proceeds to the “night stage”), and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2999). Transition. In the case of No in step 2634, in step 2638, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has the current gaming state of the normal gaming state (the normal gaming state is a non-probability changing state and a non-time shortening gaming state). ) Is determined. If Yes in step 2638, in step 2640, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the “daytime stage” as the stay stage, and proceeds to the next process (the process in step 2999). Note that also in the case of No in step 2624 or 2638, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2999). As described above, in the third embodiment, the stay stage when the game state is the time reduction game state A can be the “evening stage”, and the stay stage when the time reduction game state B is the game state. It is configured to be a “night stage” or a “chance stage”, and stays depending on whether the time reduction game state is the time reduction game state A or the time reduction game state B even in the time reduction game state. The stages are configured to be different. Further, the stay stage in the time reduction gaming state B is configured so that a plurality of types of stay stages of “night stage” and “chance stage” can be set. In addition, after the special game relating to "5A / 5B" which is the big hit symbol which becomes the probability fluctuation game state and the time shortening game state B after the special game ends, and after the special game ends, the non-probability fluctuation game state and the time shortening game state B It is configured such that the stay stage is the same “chance stage” after the end of the special game relating to “2A · 2B” which is the big hit symbol. Note that in the third embodiment, the “chance stage” is set to the stay stage as an effect to the last, but is not limited to this. When the “chance stage” is set as the stay stage, the limited frequency state is set. May be configured so that the average value of the fluctuation time is relatively long, and in such a case, the game is in the probability fluctuation gaming state with the relatively long fluctuation time. By frequently invoking the player as to whether or not it is possible, the player can be more excited and immersed in the game in a period in which the player pays attention to the playability.

  With the above-described configuration, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, time is reduced by having two auxiliary game time reduction flags A and A as auxiliary game time reduction flags. The game state is configured to have two time-reduced game states, a time-reduced game state A and a time-reduced game state B. In the time-reduced game state A, the timing when the electric accessory is released for a long time (the game ball enters the ball easily) ) Is the first half, and in the time-reduced gaming state B, the timing when the electric accessory is long-opened (the timing at which the game ball becomes easy to enter) is the second half. In the first half, the distribution member is in the first mode, and in the second half, the distribution member is in the second mode. When the game ball enters the entrance, the ball enters the first open entrance, and the game ball enters the sorting entrance where the electric accessory is installed in the time-saving game state B. In this case, the ball will enter the second open entrance, and if a game ball enters the first open entrance, the first non-motorized accessory installed at the first main game start port will be When the game ball enters the second opening entrance, the first non-motor-operated accessory installed at the second main game starting opening is opened, so that the time is shortened. The game progresses by entering the first main game starting port, and in the time-reduced game state B, the game proceeds by entering the second main game starting port. Progresses, it is possible to create a novel game having different game properties depending on whether the time reduction game state is the time reduction game state A or the time reduction game state B even in one probability varying game state. Becomes

(Modification Example 1 from Third Embodiment)
In the third embodiment, the configuration of the gaming machine having a plurality of time-reduced gaming states has been exemplified, but such novel gaming properties can be applied to gaming machines of various specifications. Therefore, a configuration different from the third embodiment as a gaming machine having a plurality of time-reduced gaming states is referred to as a first modification example from the third embodiment, and only the points different from the third embodiment will be described below in detail.

  First, FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game, according to the subroutine of step 1750 (third modification 1) in FIG. 15 in the first modification from the third embodiment. The changes from the third embodiment are steps 1755 (third variation 1) to step 1775 (third variation 1) and step 1761 (third variation 1), that is, the main game probability change flag is turned on in step 1754. After that, in step 1755 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (80 times in this example) in the probability variation counter MP51c. Next, in Step 1756 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the current stop symbol is a time-saving A big hit symbol (a big-hit symbol with a relatively small number of time savings given after the end of the big hit. In the example, it is determined whether or not 2A, 3A, 2B). In the case of Yes in step 1756 (third variation 1), in step 1775 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M stores the predetermined value A (relatively small number of time savings, In the example, 80 times) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1758. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1756 (third variation 1), in other words, the current stop symbol is a time saving B big hit symbol (a big hit symbol with a relatively large number of time savings given after the end of the big hit. In this example, 5A, 7A, 5B, and 7B), in step 1761 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M stores a predetermined value B (a relatively large number of time savings) in the time saving number counter MP52c. Then, 100 times is set, and the routine goes to Step 1762. As described above, in the first modification example from the third embodiment, the probability variation gaming state is configured to end when a predetermined number of symbol changes are completed after the end of the big hit (similar to the present embodiment). , The number of time savings given after the end of the big hit can be varied depending on the big hit symbol. The maximum value of the number of time savings given after the end of the big hit is 100, while the maximum value of the probability change number given after the end of the big hit is 80, and the maximum value of the number of time savings is larger. Has become. In addition, while the number of time savings after the end of the big hit on the first main game side is 80 times, the number of time savings after the end of the big hit on the second main game side is 100 times, and after the end of the big hit on the first main gaming side. Is smaller than the number of time savings after the end of the big hit on the second main game side (the big hit on the second main game side is more advantageous for the player). In addition, in the first modification example from the third embodiment, after the big hit on the first main game side, there is a case where the game shifts to the time reduction game state A and a case where the game shifts to the time reduction game state B, After the big hit on the main game side, it may be configured to shift only to the time reduction game state B. In addition, when the first main game side wins a big hit in the time shortening game state A, the number of times reduced after the end of the big hit is relatively reduced. May be configured so that the number of time savings after the end of the big hit becomes relatively large. In addition, on the second main game side, regardless of whether a big hit is won in the time-reduced game state A or a big hit in the time-reduced game state B, the number of time savings after the end of the big hit is relatively large. You may comprise so that it may become.

Further, in the third embodiment and the first modification example from the third embodiment, the number of probable changes and the number of working hours after the end of the big hit may be configured as follows.
(1) After completion of all the big hits, the number of probable changes is set to 80, and the predetermined time A is set to 80 and the predetermined value B is set to 100 as the number of time savings.
(2) After all the jackpots are completed, the number of probable changes is set to 80, and the predetermined times A and B are set to 60 and 80, respectively.
(3) After the end of all the big hits, the number of probable changes is set to 80, and the predetermined times A and B are set to A and B, respectively.

  With the above-described configuration, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification example from the third embodiment, the probability variation gaming state can be ended by a predetermined number of symbol variation ends after the end of the special game. In the case of the time-reduced game state A, the number of probable changes and the number of time reductions are set to the same value. With such a configuration, it is possible to realize a more sharp game.

(Modification Example 2 from Third Embodiment)
In the third embodiment, the configuration of the gaming machine having a plurality of time-reduced gaming states has been exemplified, but such novel gaming properties can be applied to gaming machines of various specifications. Therefore, as a gaming machine having a plurality of time-reduced gaming states, a configuration different from that of the third embodiment is referred to as a second modification from the third embodiment, and only the points that are different from the third embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game, according to the subroutine of step 1750 (third) of FIG. 15 in the second modification example from the third embodiment. The changes from the third embodiment are step 1786-1 (third modification 2) to step 1786-4 (third modification 2), step 1557 (third modification 2), and step 1761 (third modification 2). Yes, that is, in step 1786-1 (third variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the counter value of the probability variation continuous counter MP51c-2. Next, in step 1786-2 (third variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the probability variation continuous counter MP51c-2 has reached a specified value (4 in this example). I do. If Yes in step 1786-2 (third variation 2), in step 1786-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the positive variation continuous counter MP51c-2 to zero. Next, in step 1786-4 (third variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the current stop symbol to the time-saving A big hit symbol (the auxiliary game time-short flag It is determined whether or not A is a big hit symbol that is turned on, in this example, 3A or 2B). If Yes in Step 1786-4 (Third Variation 2), in Step 1775 (Third Variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value A (a relatively small number of time savings) in the time saving number counter MP52c. , 80 times in this example), and the process proceeds to step 1758.

  Also, in step 1760, the stop symbol is a big hit symbol in which the auxiliary game time short flag B is turned on when shifting to the non-probability variable gaming state after the end of the big hit, and in this example, 5A, 7A, 5B. 7B), or after turning on the main game probability change flag in step 1754, in step 1761 (third variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M stores the predetermined value B (relative (In this example, 100 times), and the process proceeds to step 1762. If the answer is No in Step 1786-2 (third variation 2), the process proceeds to Step 1754, and if the determination is No in Step 1786-4 (Third variation 2), the process proceeds to Step 1760. As described above, in the modified example 2 from the third embodiment, the limiter machine is used similarly to the second embodiment, and the number of jackpots won in the probability-variable gaming state is a predetermined number of times (the limiter is reached). After the big hit of the predetermined number of times, the game shifts to the non-probability changing game state. However, depending on the big hit symbol related to the big hit of the predetermined number of times, the game shifts to the (1) time shortening game state and the number of times saved is relatively small. (80 times), (2) transition to the time reduction game state and the number of times saved is relatively large (100 times), and (3) non-time reduction game state. It is configured. In addition, the average value of the number of time savings in the case of reaching the limiter and entering the time-saving game state after the end of the big hit (or the average of the number of time savings relating to all the big hits calculated by making the number of time savings 0 in the case of not being in the time-saving gaming state) The average value) is larger after the big hit on the second main game side than after the big hit on the first main game side. It should be noted that the configuration may be such that the auxiliary game time reduction flag A can be turned on even when the probability-change continuous counter value has not reached the prescribed value, that is, when No in step 1786-2 (third variation 2). Specifically, if the big hit in which the probability change continuous counter value does not reach the specified value after the big hit is the big hit on the first main game side, the game state after the big hit end is “time shortening game state A: time shortening”. The game state transitions at a ratio of "game state B = 3: 1", and if the big hit in which the probability variable continuous counter value does not reach the specified value after the big hit is the big hit on the second main game side, the game state after the big hit end is It is configured to shift at a ratio of "time-reduced game state A: time-reduced game state B = 1: 9", and the big hit in which the probability variable continuous counter value becomes the specified value after the end of the big hit is the big hit on the first main game side. In that case, The game state after the end shifts at a ratio of “time-reduced game state A: time-reduced game state B = 5: 1”, and after the big hit ends, the big hit in which the probable variable continuous counter value becomes the specified value is the big hit on the second main game side. In this case, the gaming state after the end of the big hit may be changed to the gaming state B in which the time is reduced by 100%. With such a configuration, by shifting to the time reduction gaming state B until the probability-change continuous counter value reaches the specified value, it is advantageous for the player even after the probability-change continuous counter value reaches the specified value ( A game state that is advantageous (compared to the time-reduced game state A) can be set, and the game property of how the game can be shifted to the time-reduced game state B before the probability-variable continuous counter value reaches the specified value is created. Can be done.

  With the above-described configuration, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification example from the third embodiment, when the jackpot that has been won in the probability-variable gaming state has continued for a predetermined number of times, the jackpot for the predetermined number of times ends. Even if it is configured to shift to the non-probability changing game state and the time reduction game state later, the time reduction game state A, the time reduction game state B, the non-time By configuring the game state to be shifted to any one of the shortened game states, it is possible to provide a highly entertaining gaming machine in which the number of obtained game balls differs depending on the timing of winning the big hit symbol of the player. it can.

  In the second modification example from the third embodiment, after the big hit on the first main game side, there is a case where the game shifts to the time reduction game state A and a case where the game shifts to the time reduction game state B, After the big hit on the main gaming side, it may be configured to shift only to the time reduction gaming state B. In addition, when the first main game side wins a big hit in the time shortening game state A, the number of times reduced after the end of the big hit is relatively reduced. May be configured so that the number of time savings after the end of the big hit becomes relatively large. In addition, on the second main game side, regardless of whether a big hit is won in the time-reduced game state A or a big hit in the time-reduced game state B, the number of time savings after the end of the big hit is relatively large. You may comprise so that it may become.

(Modification 3 from Third Embodiment)
In the third embodiment, the configuration of the gaming machine having a plurality of time-reduced gaming states has been exemplified, but such novel gaming properties can be applied to gaming machines of various specifications. Therefore, as a gaming machine having a plurality of time-reduced gaming states, a configuration different from that of the third embodiment will be referred to as a third modified example from the third embodiment, and only the modified points from the third embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 55 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process according to a subroutine of steps 1400 (1) and (2) in FIG. 10 in a third modification example of the third embodiment. A change from the third embodiment is step 3050 (third modification 3). That is, after shifting the hold information in step 1406, in step 3050 (third modification 3), the CPUMC of the main control board M Then, a fall lottery execution process described later is executed, and the routine goes to Step 1408.

  Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the drop lottery execution process according to the subroutine of step 3050 (third variation 3) in FIG. 55 in a third modification example of the third embodiment. First, in step 3052, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current gaming state is a probability varying gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 3052, in step 3054, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not to transition from the probability-variable gaming state to the non-probability-variable gaming state in which the CPUMC of the main control board M wins at a predetermined probability (1/50 in this example). Lottery). Next, in step 3056, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the falling lottery has been won. If Yes in step 3056, in step 3058, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability change flag, and proceeds to the next process (the process in step 1408). It should be noted that also in the case of No in Step 3052 or Step 3056, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in Step 1408).

  With the above configuration, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification example from the third embodiment, the falling lottery is executed for each symbol change in the probability changing gaming state, and the falling lottery is executed. By configuring to shift to the non-probability variable gaming state when winning, in a gaming machine having a plurality of auxiliary gaming time reduction flags, the profit rate in the probability varying gaming state depends on which auxiliary gaming time reduction flag is on At the same time, it is possible to make the gaming machine highly entertaining by injecting, for each symbol change, whether or not the probability fluctuation gaming state advantageous to the player ends.

  In addition, in the modification example 3 from the third embodiment, the number of time savings guaranteed after the end of the big hit may be different depending on the big hit symbol, and in such a case, the big hit on the second main game side The average value of the guaranteed number of time savings may be larger after the end than at the end of the big hit on the first main game side. Here, the security means that even if the game is shifted from the probability-variable gaming state to the non-probability-variable gaming state by winning the falling lottery, the time reduction game is completed until the guaranteed symbol reduction of the number of time savings is completed. It is determinative that the state continues, and specifically, (1) the number of times that the first main game side is guaranteed is 50 times, and the second main game side is guaranteed. When the number of time savings is 100, (2) when the number of time savings that can be guaranteed is 50 and 100, the time after the end of the big hit on the second main game side is greater than the time after the end of the big hit on the first main game side. May be configured such that 100 times are easily selected. Further, even when the number of times of change after the big hit exceeds the number of guarantees, if the probability-variation game state is continued (if it has not fallen), the time-reduced game state is also continued. In addition, if the player wins the falling lottery thereafter, the time-saving game state ends, but the timing at which the time-saving game state ends is (1) at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol fluctuation won in the falling lottery. (2) The end of the change in the symbol change won in the drop lottery, or (3) the start of the change in the next change of the symbol change won in the drop lottery. In addition, it is not necessary to ensure that the number of times saved is reduced, and a big hit may be provided in which the time-reduced game state ends when the symbol change ends at a fixed number of times (for example, 50 times). In addition, the above configuration may be combined. Specifically, a big hit symbol in which the number of times saved is fixed at 50 times, a big hit symbol in which the number of times saved is 50 times, and the number of times the number of times saved is 100 A big hit symbol that becomes a round may be provided. In the case of such a configuration, after the big hit on the second main game side is completed, "the number of times saved is 100 times → the number of times reduced 50 times is guaranteed → the number of times reduced 50 times is fixed" in the order of easy selection. After the end of the big hit on the side, it may be configured such that “fixed 50 times of time saving → secure 50 times of time saving → guaranteed 100 times of time saving” in the order of easy selection.

(Modification 4 from Third Embodiment)
In the third embodiment, the configuration of the gaming machine having a plurality of time-reduced gaming states has been exemplified, but such novel gaming properties can be applied to gaming machines of various specifications. Therefore, as a gaming machine having a plurality of time-reduced gaming states, a configuration different from that of the third embodiment is referred to as a fourth modified example from the third embodiment, and only the modified points from the third embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 57 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in a fourth modification example from the third embodiment. The points different from the third embodiment are that the special winning opening is two, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20, and the ball enters during the special game in the second special winning opening C20. By doing so, the player has the specific area C22 in which the right to shift to the probability varying gaming state can be obtained.

  Next, FIG. 58 is an example of a main game table in a fourth modification example from the third embodiment. In the gaming machine according to the fourth modification example from the third embodiment, the gaming ball enters the specific area C22 in the distribution game execution round (the round in which the second winning opening C20 is opened) in the special game execution. By doing so, it is configured to shift to the probability fluctuation game state after the end of the special game (so-called ball game machine). In addition, as an opening mode of the second big winning opening C20 in the distribution game execution round, a long opening in which the game ball easily enters the specific area C22, a short opening in which the game ball is difficult to enter the specific area C22, The long open jackpot is a long open jackpot, and the short open jackpot is a short open jackpot. As the types of big hits, "2A / 2B" is a 4R short open big hit, "3A / 5A / 5B" is a 4R long open big hit, and "7A / 7B" is a 16R long open big hit. From the first main game side Also, the ratio of the long open big hit in the big hit is higher on the second main game side.

  Next, FIG. 59 is a flowchart of a special game control process according to a subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. 6 in a fourth modification example from the third embodiment. The changes from the third embodiment are step 1711 (third variation 4) and step 3100 (third variation 4), that is, after setting the special game start display instruction command to the sub side in step 1708, Alternatively, if the special game execution flag is on in step 1710, in step 1711 (third variation 4), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the current round is a distributed game execution round (2R in this example). Is determined. If Yes in step 1711 (third variation 4), in step 3100 (third variation 4), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a distribution game execution process described later, and proceeds to step 1734.

  Next, FIG. 60 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process according to the subroutine of step 3100 (third variation 4) in FIG. 59 in a fourth modification example from the third embodiment. First, in step 3102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the distribution game execution flag is on. If Yes in step 3102, the process moves to step 3116. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3102, in step 3104, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the stopped main game symbol is a long open symbol (the second big winning opening C20 is relatively long in the distribution game execution round). It is a big hit symbol that is open for time, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 5A / 5B / 7A / 7B). In the case of Yes in step 3104, in step 3106, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the long opening pattern (for example, opening for 15 seconds as the opening pattern of the second special winning opening C20 having the specific area C22). , An open pattern designed so that the entry of the ball into the specific area C22 is substantially definite. If No in step 3104, in other words, if the stop symbol is 2A, in step 3108, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the short opening pattern as the opening pattern of the second special winning opening C20 having the specific area C22. (For example, an opening pattern that is designed to be open for 0.1 second and the non-entry into the specific area C22 is substantially definite) is set, and the process proceeds to Step 3110. In the second embodiment, the long open symbol of the first main game side is "5A / 7A", and the ratio selected at the time of the big hit is "324/1024". The long open symbol on the side is "5B / 7B" and the ratio selected at the time of the big hit is "824/1024", so the big hit on the second main game side is larger than the big hit on the first main game side Is configured such that the second large winning opening C20 is more likely to be long open in the distribution game execution round, that is, the game ball can easily enter the specific area C22 during the big hit. In the case where a gaming machine (a so-called ST machine) in which the probability variation gaming state is terminated by the end of the symbol variation, a predetermined number of times from the end of the big hit as described above, the second main gaming side has a big hit. May be configured to be a long open big hit.Although not shown, in the long open big hit, the big hit in which the auxiliary game short time flag A is turned on after the end of the big hit and the auxiliary game short time flag B are turned on. There is a big hit, and the big hit in which the auxiliary game time saving flag B, which is advantageous to the player, is turned on is such that the long open big hit on the second main game side is higher than the long open big hit on the first main game side. Has become.

  Next, in step 3110, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c. Next, in step 3112, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the distribution game continuation flag. Next, in step 3114, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second special winning opening C20 in the set opening pattern, and proceeds to step 3116.

  Next, in step 3116, the CPUMC of the main control board M checks the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and determines whether or not a predetermined number (ten) of game balls have won the second large winning opening C20. . If Yes in step 3116, the process moves to step 3120. On the other hand, if No in step 3116, in step 3118, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the opening period (set opening pattern) of the second special winning opening C20 has ended. If Yes in step 3118, the process moves to step 3120. Next, in step 3120, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second special winning opening C20. Next, in step 3122, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the distribution game execution flag. Next, in step 3124, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a game ball has entered the specific area C22 in the execution round of the distribution game. In the case of Yes in step 3124, in step 3126, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game certain change transition reservation flag, and proceeds to step 3128. Incidentally, also in the case of No in step 3124, the process shifts to step 3128. Next, in step 3128, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the number-of-rounds counter (ends the execution round of the sorting game), and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1734). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 3118, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1734).

  With the configuration described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth modification example from the third embodiment, the specific area is provided in the special winning opening, and the game ball enters the specific area during the big hit. Even in a gaming machine that shifts to the probability fluctuation gaming state after the end of the big hit, a big hit that easily enters the specific area and a big hit that is hard to enter the specific area are provided. Also, by having a big hit that shifts to the time shortened gaming state A after the end of the big hit and a big hit that shifts to the time shortened gaming state B after the end of the big hit, it is determined whether or not to shift to the probability variation gaming state, It is possible to create a novel playability that pays attention to two elements, that is, the transition to the state A and the time reduction game state B.

  In the fourth modified example from the third embodiment, when the big hits won in the above-mentioned probability varying gaming state are repeated a predetermined number of times, the game is shifted to the non-probability varying gaming state after the end of the predetermined number of the big hits. (A so-called limiter machine) or a gaming machine (a so-called falling lottery machine) that executes a lottery in which a transition to the non-probability-variable gaming state is performed in the probability-variable gaming state.

A configuration example applicable to the fourth modification example from the third embodiment will be described below.
(1) The expected value of the number of prize balls in the big hit on the second main game side is larger than the expected value of the number of prize balls in the big hit on the first main game side.
(2) The ratio of the long open jackpot in the jackpot on the second main game side (the jackpot that is easy to enter a specific area in the distribution game execution round) is higher than the ratio of the long open jackpot in the jackpot on the first main game side. .
(3) The variation pattern table to be referred to after the end of the big hit varies depending on whether or not the specific area is hit during the big hit.
(4) The transition mode of the variation pattern table to be referred to after the end of the big hit differs depending on whether or not the ball enters the specific area during the big hit (for example, big hit A: 20 change table 1 → 30 change table 2, big hit B: 50). Fluctuation table 3).
(5) Whether or not to enter the probability-variable gaming state after the end of the big hit differs depending on whether or not to enter the specific area during the big hit.
(6) Regardless of whether or not to enter the specific area during the big hit, after the big hit is completed, the game shifts to the time reduction game state.
(7) The stay stage after the end of the big hit differs depending on whether or not the ball enters the specific area during the big hit.
(8) The tendency of the final fluctuation of the time-reduced game state to change after the end of the big hit varies depending on whether or not the ball enters the specific area during the big hit (the average value of the changing time, the production mode, and the shortest change time that can be selected). ).
(9) The gaming machine is configured such that the probability-variation gaming state can be ended according to the number of symbol fluctuations after the end of the big hit (so-called ST machine), and always transitions to the probability-variation gaming state after the end of the big hit on the second main game side. (After the big hit on the first main game side, a case where the game does not shift to the probability varying game state may be provided).
(10) The gaming machine is configured such that the probability-variation gaming state does not end according to the number of symbol changes after the end of the big hit, and the probability-variation gaming state is maintained after the big hit on the first main gaming side and after the big hit on the second main gaming side. There is a case where it shifts and a case where it does not shift (after the big hit end of the second main game side, it is easier to shift to the probability fluctuation gaming state after the big hit end than after the big hit end of the first main game side, that is, the second The big hit on the main game side is more likely to be a big hit that easily enters a specific area in the distribution game execution round during the big hit than the big hit on the first main game side).
Note that the above configuration is configured to shift to the probability varying game state after the end of the big hit by entering a specific area in the distribution game execution round during the big hit, and thus to the probability varying gaming state. = Enter the specific area during the big hit, do not shift to the probability variation gaming state = Do not enter the specific area during the big hit.

(Modification Example 5 from Third Embodiment)
In the third embodiment, the configuration of the gaming machine having a plurality of time-reduced gaming states has been exemplified, but such novel gaming properties can be applied to gaming machines of various specifications. Therefore, as a gaming machine having a plurality of time-reduced gaming states, a configuration different from that of the third embodiment will be referred to as a fifth modification example of the third embodiment, and only the points different from the third embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 61 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in a fifth modification example of the third embodiment. In the fourth modification example from the third embodiment, the first main game start port AA10 and the first main game start port BA12 are provided as the first main game start ports, and the first main game start port A12 flows down the left side of the game area. The game balls are configured to be easy to enter the first main game start port AA10 and difficult to enter the first main game start port BA12, and the game balls flowing down the right side of the game area to the first main game start port AA10. It is configured such that it is difficult to enter the ball and it is easy to enter the first main game starting port BA12 (when the second non-motor-driven accessory B11hd is open). Further, since the first main game starting port BA12 is closed by the second non-electrically driven accessory B11hd, it is difficult for game balls to enter unless the second non-electrically driven accessory B11hd is in the open state. Here, the starting winning prize port corresponding to the first main game is configured such that a common winning / failing lottery, a symbol lottery, and the like are executed regardless of which game ball enters the ball. It should be added that no matter what game ball enters, the game content is not different.

  Next, a distribution start port unit C50 is provided below the game area (with reference to the center point of the game area). Although details of the distribution start port unit C50 will be described later, as illustrated, the distribution start port unit C50 has a first main game start port AA10 and a second main game start port B10. The game ball flowing down the game area is configured to be easily guided to one of the first main game start port AA10 and the second main game start port B10.

  Next, FIG. 62 is an overall view and an operation diagram of the distribution start port unit C50. First, the distribution start port unit C50 has a common entrance C51 into which game balls flowing down the game area D30 can enter, and a game provided below the common entrance C51 and flowing down from the common entrance C51. A starting port distributing member C50y (in this example, a three-legged member inclined in the left and right directions around the support shaft) for regularly distributing the ball in the left-right direction, and a starting port distributing member C50y provided below the starting port distributing member C50y. A first main game start port AA10, a second main game start port B10 provided below the start port distribution member C50y, and a distribution start port unit provided below the start port distribution member C50y. A discharge opening capable of discharging the game balls in C50 to the outside of the distribution start port unit C50 without entering the first main game start port AA10 and the second main game start port B10. The distribution start port unit C50 configured as described above tilts the game ball that has flowed into the common entrance C51 in the horizontal direction of the start port distribution member C50y, as indicated by the dotted line in the figure. Thereby, it is configured to guide to one of the first main game start port AA10 and the second main game start port B10. For example, a case where the starting port distributing member C50y is performing a tilting operation to the left is “first position”, and a case where the starting port distributing member C50y is performing a tilting operation to the right is “second position”. In the case where the "start position" is set, the game ball that has flowed into the common entrance C51 is guided to the first main game start port AA10 side under the situation where the starting port distribution member C50y is the "second position", In a situation where the starting port sorting member C50y is displaced to the “first position”, while the starting port sorting member C50y is at the “first position”, the game ball that has flowed into the common ball entrance C51 is the second main ball. While being guided to the game start port B10 side, the start port distribution member C50y is displaced to the "second position". In the present example, the tilting operation of the starting port distributing member C50y in the left-right direction is configured to be performed by the own weight of the game ball. As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the common ball entrance C51 is mechanically configured. A game ball is alternately distributed to one of the first main game start port AA10 and the second main game start port B10 (after distributing one game ball to one of them, and one to the other). This is designed to repeat the operation of distributing the individual game balls).

In the case of having the distribution start port unit C50,
(1) A gaming machine in which the probability-variation gaming state can be ended according to the number of symbol changes after the end of the big hit is configured (a so-called ST machine), and the end of the big hit on the first main game side is on the second main game side. The number of time savings given after the end of the big hit is relatively larger than that after the big hit, and the expected prize ball acquisition value in the big hit of the first main game side is smaller than the expected prize ball acquisition value in the big hit of the second main game side.
(2) The gaming machine is configured such that the probability-variation gaming state can be ended by the number of symbol changes after the end of the big hit (so-called ST machine), and the end of the big hit on the first main game side is on the second main game side. The number of time savings given after the end of the big hit is relatively smaller than that after the big hit, and the expected prize ball acquisition value in the big hit on the first main game side is larger than the expected prize ball acquisition value in the big hit on the second main game side.
(3) A gaming machine which is shifted to a non-probability varying gaming state after the predetermined number of successful jackpots have been performed for a predetermined number of consecutive times in the probability varying gaming state (a so-called limiter machine). After the end of the big hit on the second main game side, the number of times of shortening in the case of transition to the non-probability changing game state and the time shortening game state after the end of the big hit is relatively larger than after the end of the big hit on the second main game side. The expected prize ball acquisition value at the big hit on the gaming side is smaller than the expected prize ball acquisition value at the big hit on the second main gaming side.
(4) When the big hits won in the probability varying gaming state are repeated for a predetermined number of times, the gaming machine shifts to the non-probability varying gaming state after the end of the predetermined number of big hits (a so-called limiter machine). After the end of the big hit on the second main game side, the number of times of shortening in the non-probability changing game state and the time reduction game state after the end of the big hit is relatively smaller than after the end of the big hit on the second main game side. The expected prize ball acquisition value at the jackpot on the gaming side is greater than the expected prize ball acquisition value at the jackpot on the second main gaming side.
(5) The gaming machine is configured to execute a lottery that shifts to a non-variable non-probability-variable gaming state in the probability-variable gaming state (a so-called falling lottery machine). The number of fluctuations in which it is ensured that the game state is reduced in time after the end of the big hit is relatively larger than after the end of the big hit on the main gaming side, and the expected prize ball acquisition value in the big hit on the first main gaming side is the second main game. It is less than the expected prize ball acquisition value at the side jackpot.
(6) The gaming machine is configured to execute a lottery that shifts to the non-probability-variable gaming state in the probability-variable gaming state (a so-called falling lottery machine). The number of fluctuations in which the state of reduced time is guaranteed after the end of the big hit is relatively smaller than after the end of the big hit on the main gaming side, and the expected prize ball acquisition value in the big hit on the first main gaming side is the second main game. It is more than the expected value of winning the prize ball at the big hit on the side.
(7) The gaming machine is configured to be able to shift to the probability-variable gaming state after the end of the big hit by the game ball entering a specific area within the big win in the distribution game execution round during the big hit (so-called ball) The chance of opening the big winning port in the distribution game execution round is longer after the big hit on the first main game side than after the big hit on the second main game side (relative game balls are The ratio of the jackpot that becomes the open mode that makes it easy to enter the ball) is high (the ratio of the long open jackpot is high), and the expected prize ball acquisition value in the big hit on the first main game side is the prize ball in the big hit on the second main game side. Less than expected acquisition value.
(8) When a game ball enters a specific area within a big win in a distribution game execution round during a big hit, the gaming machine is configured to be able to shift to a probability varying game state after the end of the big hit (a so-called ball) The chance of opening the big winning port in the distribution game execution round is longer after the big hit on the first main game side than after the big hit on the second main game side (relative game balls are The ratio of the jackpot that becomes the open mode that facilitates entering the ball) is low (the ratio of the jackpot that is long open is low), and the expected prize ball acquisition value in the jackpot of the first main game side is the prize ball in the jackpot of the second main game side. More than expected acquisition value.
(9) The gaming machine is configured to be able to shift to a probability-variable gaming state after the end of the big hit by the game ball entering a specific area within the big win in the distribution game execution round during the big hit (so-called ball) The chance of opening the big winning port in the distribution game execution round is longer after the big hit on the first main game side than after the big hit on the second main game side (relative game balls are The rate of big hits that makes it easy to enter the ball) is high (the rate of long open big hits is high), and the time after finishing the big hit on the first main game side is shorter than after the big hit on the second main game side. The number is relatively small.
(10) A gaming machine that is capable of shifting to a probability-variable gaming state after the end of the jackpot, when a game ball enters a specific area within the big win in the distribution game execution round during the jackpot (a so-called ball) The chance of opening the big winning port in the distribution game execution round is longer after the big hit on the first main game side than after the big hit on the second main game side (relative game balls are The ratio of the big hit that becomes the open mode that makes it easy to enter the ball) is low (the ratio of the long open big hit is low), and the time is shorter after the big hit on the first main game side than after the big hit on the second main game side. The number is relatively large.
The configuration may be as described above.

  Next, FIG. 63 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to Step 1300 in FIG. 3 in Modification Example 5 from the third embodiment. First, the points changed from the third embodiment are as follows: step 1302 (third variation 5), step 1303 (third variation 5), step 1307 (third variation 5), step 1309 (third variation 5), step 1317 ( Regarding the third variation 5) and step 1319 (third variation 5), that is, in step 1302 (third variation 5), has the CPUMC of the main control board M received the first main game start port AA10? Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 1302 (third variation 5), the process proceeds to step 1304. If No, in step 1303 (third variation 5), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the first main game start port BA12. It is determined whether or not there is a prize. If Yes in step 1303 (third variation 5), the process proceeds to step 1304, and if No, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 1400). Also, after acquiring the first main game content determination random number in step 1306, in step 1307 (third variation 5), the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits the hold information of the first main game side and the second main game side. With reference to the current total number of reserves, the total number of reserves + 1 is derived as a new winning order. Next, in step 1309 (third variation 5), the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores the acquired first main game content decision random number and the derived winning order in the RAM area of the main control board M as holding information. Then, the process proceeds to step 1310.

  Also, after acquiring the second main game content determination random number in step 1316, in step 1317 (third variation 5), the CPUMC of the main control board M changes the hold information of the first main game side and the second main game side. With reference to the current total number of reserves, the total number of reserves + 1 is derived as a new winning order. Next, in step 1319 (third variation 5), the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores the acquired second main game content determination random number and the derived winning order in the RAM area of the main control board M as holding information. Then, the process proceeds to step 1320.

  As described above, in the fifth modification example from the third embodiment, the distribution start port unit C50 is provided, and when the left-handed execution is performed in the non-probability changing game state and the non-time shortening game state, the game proceeds. Since the first main game side (maximum 4 pieces) and the second main game side (maximum 4 pieces) can be generated alternately, a maximum of 8 pieces can be stored.

  Next, FIG. 64 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display processing according to step 1400 in the fifth modification example from the third embodiment. First, a change from the third embodiment is in step 1402 (third modification 5), and the purpose is to realize the winning order of the main game hold. That is, at the time of executing the processing of the subroutine, in step 1402 (third variation 5), the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the hold information of the first main game side and the second main game side, and determines the earliest winning order. It is determined whether or not the hold of the first main game side is held. If Yes in step 1402 (third variation 5), a process related to the variation of the first main game symbol is executed in step 1400 (1). On the other hand, if No in step 1402 (third variation 5), a process related to the variation of the second main game symbol is executed in step 1400 (2).

  As described above, in the fifth modification example from the third embodiment, it is configured to execute the hold-out in accordance with the winning order. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second main game symbol (the first main game symbol) is used. When there is a reserved ball of the first main game symbol (second main game symbol), regardless of the existence of the reserved ball of the first main game symbol (second main game symbol), even if the winning order is the reservation of the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) The first one may be configured so that the second main game symbol (the first main game symbol) is executed with priority given to the reserved game, or the parallel lottery for simultaneously selecting both main game symbols in parallel. It may be configured to execute.

  Next, FIG. 65 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process according to Steps 1400 (1) and (2) in FIG. 64 in Modification Example 5 from the third embodiment. First, a change from the third embodiment is about step 1404 (third modification 5), and the purpose is to update the winning order of the remaining holds appropriately each time the main game hold is consumed. is there. That is, when the change start condition is satisfied in step 1403, in step 1404 (third variation 5), the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the first main game side hold information (second main game side hold information). The information is read out and deleted from the hold information, the remaining hold information is shifted, and the winning order of each hold is subtracted by 1 (hereinafter, processing relating to main game fluctuation is executed).

  With the above-described configuration, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 5 from the third embodiment, the left-handed execution is performed in the non-probability changing gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state, and the game proceeds. In this case, the game ball entering the distribution start port unit C50 is alternately distributed to the first main game start port and the second main game start port, and the first main game side becomes a big hit or the second main game. It is possible to realize the gaming property that the profit rate of the player differs depending on whether the big hit occurs on the side. Further, in the case where the right advance is executed in the probability varying game state or the time shortening game state and the game is advanced, the second non-motorized accessory is opened and the second main game start port in the distribution start port unit C50 is opened. By allowing the game balls to enter, a novel gaming machine having the same configuration as the third embodiment and having the distribution start port unit C50 can be provided.

  Note that the configuration having the distribution start port unit C50 as in Modification Example 5 from the third embodiment may be applied to any of the above-described configurations of the present embodiment to Modification Example 4 from Third Embodiment. .

Further, the following configuration may be applied to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment.
(1) Parallel lottery can be executed.
(2) The second main game side has a small hit, or the small hit win rate of the second main game side is higher than the small hit win rate of the first main game side. (3) The second main game symbol Is relatively short (for example, the average value is 3 seconds) in the probability fluctuation game state, and is relatively long (for example, the average value is 300 seconds) in other game states.
(4) The prize ball expectation value excluding the big hit or the prize ball expectation value by the small hit is the highest in the probability varying game state and the non-time shortening game state among all the game states. (5) By winning the small hit. It is possible to shift from the probability varying gaming state and the time shortening gaming state to the probability varying gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state.
(6) The second main game side has a small hit, and in the time-reduced game state B, the fluctuation efficiency is higher than the time-reduced game state A (the average value of the fluctuation time is shorter), and the time is reduced. By executing right-hand in the game state B, small hits are frequently won.

Further, the following configuration may be applied to the gaming machine according to Modification Example 5 from Third Embodiment to Third Embodiment.
(1) It has a first main game side and a second main game side, and when there is a hold of the first main game side and a hold of the second main game side, the second main game side Digest preferentially from hold.
(2) In the non-time-saving game state, the prefetch lottery (prefetch effect) of the first main game side can be executed, and the prefetch lottery (prefetch effect) of the second main game side cannot be executed.
(3) In the time-reduced game state A, the prefetch lottery (prefetch effect) of the first main game side can be executed, and the prefetch lottery (prefetch effect) of the second main game side cannot be executed.
(4) In the time-reduced gaming state B, the prefetch lottery (prefetch effect) of the first main game side is disabled, and the prefetch lottery (prefetch effect) of the second main game side is executable.

M main control board,
MP11t-H Auxiliary game symbol change management timer, MP11t-C First and second main game symbol change management timer MP11t-C1 First main game timer, MP11t-C2 Second main game timer MP22t-B Second main game Starting port electric accessory opening timer, MP33c Winning ball counter MP34t Special game timer, MP51c Probable change counter MP52c Time saving counter, MN52c Limited frequency counter MP41t Small hitting game timer, MP41t-2 Discharge standby timer A First main game peripheral Apparatus A10 First main game start port (first main game start port A), A11s first main game start port entrance detection device A20 first main game symbol display device, A21g first main game symbol display portion A21h first main Game symbol hold display section, B 2nd main game peripheral device B10 2nd main game start port, B11s 2nd main Technique start opening ball detection device B11d Second main game start opening electric accessory, B20 Second main game design display B21g Second main game design display, B21h Second main game design hold display C First and second Main game common use peripheral equipment, C10 1st big winning opening C11s 1st big winning opening winning detection device, C11d 1st big winning opening electric thing C20 2nd big winning opening, C21s 2nd big winning opening winning detection device C21d 2nd Big winning opening electric accessory, C22 specific area C23 2nd winning opening discharge, C23s 2nd winning opening discharge detecting device C24 Upper shielding member, C25 Lower shielding member C27 V winning opening, C27s V winning opening ball detecting device C20-1 Box-shaped member H Auxiliary game peripheral device, H10 Auxiliary game start port H11s Auxiliary game start port ball detection device, H20 Auxiliary game symbol display device H21g Auxiliary game symbol display unit, H21h Auxiliary Technical symbol reservation display unit S sub-control board, SM effect display control unit (sub-main control board)
SM21t Schematic variation time management timer, SM26c Look-ahead effect execution counter SM23c Stay stage management counter, SM23c2 Number of consecutive times counter SM24t Power-on timer SS Effect display means (sub-sub-control unit), SG effect display device, SG10 Display area SG11 Decorative symbol display Area, SG12 First Hold Display Unit SG13 Second Hold Display Unit, SB Sub Input Button SBs Sub Input Button Input Detecting Device, KH Award Ball Dispensing Control Board KE Award Ball Discharging Device, MT10 Command Sending Buffer MP51c-2 Probable Variable Continuous Counter , MN52c-1 Limited frequency counter A
MN52c-2 Limited frequency counter B, A12 First main game start port B
A12hd 1st non-motorized accessory, B10hd 2nd non-motorized accessory D10d motorized accessory, C20 sorting ball inlet C22 first open ball inlet, C23 second open ball inlet C22s first open ball inlet Detector, C23s Second open ball entry ball entry detector C24 Distributing member, C50 Distributing starter unit C51 Common inlet, C50y Starting distributing member

Claims (1)

The first starting port where game balls can enter,
A second starting port into which game balls can enter,
A variable member attached to the second starting port and capable of being displaced between an open state and a closed state, wherein when displaced to the open state, a game ball can enter the second starting port or enter the ball in comparison with the closed state. A variable member that is easy and is configured such that when displaced to the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second starting port or is difficult to enter the ball compared to the open state,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information,
A second identification information display unit capable of displaying second identification information,
A main game section for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit capable of displaying effects,
A sub-game unit for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
A first random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port,
Based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquiring means, after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display unit, the first identification information display control means controls to stop and display the first identification information. When,
A second random number acquiring unit that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port,
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquiring means, the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display unit, and the second identification information display control means controls to stop displaying the second identification information. When,
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, the variable winning opening is played until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning opening or a predetermined period elapses. Special game control means capable of executing a special game that executes a unit game that can be in an advantageous state for the player,
A low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and a stop where the first identification information or the second identification information belongs to the predetermined group. Has a high probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in the display mode is higher than the predetermined probability,
The game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member includes a normal game state and a specific game state in which the variable member is more likely to be opened than in the normal game state,
Special game if a high probability lottery condition as one unit to be executed, and the one unit is configured so that can be a low probability lottery state 且 one specific game state when a predetermined number of times in succession,
If it is a specific game state, it is configured so that it can be controlled not to be in a normal game state until a predetermined condition is satisfied,
A first variable period state in which the average value of the variable display period of the identification information is the first period, and a second variable period in which the average value of the variable display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period And at least a period state, and controls to be able to be a first variable period state in a first specific period in a specific game state after the end of execution of the special game, and in the case of the first variable period state, a specific condition is satisfied. Up to, it is configured so that it can be controlled not to be in the second fluctuation period state,
From the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display as one unit, the unit is configured to be executed at least once in the first specific period. And
It has a plurality of types of stop display mode as a stop display mode belonging to a first predetermined group in the predetermined group,
It has a plurality of types of stop display modes as a stop display mode belonging to a second predetermined group in the predetermined group,
A period until the predetermined condition is satisfied when a specific game state is set after the end of the special game executed by any one of the plurality of types of stop display modes belonging to the first predetermined group is stopped and displayed. A period until the predetermined condition is satisfied in a case where a specific game state is set after the end of the special game executed when any of the plurality of types of stop display modes belonging to the second predetermined group is stopped and displayed. Is configured to be relatively short-lived,
The sub game department,
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game unit side,
On the basis of the game information received by the game information receiving means, comprising effect display content control means capable of controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
It has a plurality of stay stages as stay stages depending upon controlling the effect display contents to be displayed on the effect display unit,
It is configured such that the display tendency of the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit is different due to the different stay stages,
And staying the stage in the low probability lottery state 且 one particular game state and stays stage in the high probability lottery state 且 one specific game state is configured to be the same,
Even in the high-probability lottery state and the specific game state, even in the low-probability lottery state and the specific game state, the specific game state can be maintained in the second specific period that is longer than the first specific period. On the other hand, in the case of the high probability lottery state and the specific game state, unlike the case of the low probability lottery state and the specific game state, the specific game state can be maintained even after the second specific period has elapsed. It is configured as follows,
Even in the high-probability lottery state and the specific game state, the low-probability lottery state and the specific game state have the same timing at which the average value of the variable display period of the identification information switches within the second specific period. Is composed of
In the high-probability lottery state and the specific game state after the lapse of the second specific period, the special game when the specific effect is executed, as compared with the high-probability lottery state and the specific game state before the lapse of the second specific period. A pachinko gaming machine configured to have a relatively high transfer expectation .

Images